ld: Add --warn-textrel and obsolete --warn-shared-textrel
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set PDP11
35 @set POWERPC
36 @set POWERPC64
37 @set Renesas
38 @set S/390
39 @set SPU
40 @set TICOFF
41 @set WIN32
42 @set XTENSA
43 @end ifset
44 @c man end
45
46 @ifnottex
47 @dircategory Software development
48 @direntry
49 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
50 @end direntry
51 @end ifnottex
52
53 @copying
54 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57 @end ifset
58 version @value{VERSION}.
59
60 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
61
62 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
63 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
64 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
67 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
68 @end copying
69 @iftex
70 @finalout
71 @setchapternewpage odd
72 @settitle The GNU linker
73 @titlepage
74 @title The GNU linker
75 @sp 1
76 @subtitle @code{ld}
77 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79 @end ifset
80 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81 @author Steve Chamberlain
82 @author Ian Lance Taylor
83 @page
84
85 @tex
86 {\parskip=0pt
87 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
89 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
90 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91 }
92 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93 @end tex
94
95 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
96 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
97 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
98
99 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
100 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
101 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
104 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
105 @c man end
106
107 @end titlepage
108 @end iftex
109 @contents
110 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
112 @ifnottex
113 @node Top
114 @top LD
115 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 @end ifset
119 version @value{VERSION}.
120
121 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
122 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
124
125 @menu
126 * Overview:: Overview
127 * Invocation:: Invocation
128 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 @ifset GENERIC
130 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131 @end ifset
132 @ifclear GENERIC
133 @ifset H8300
134 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135 @end ifset
136 @ifset Renesas
137 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
138 @end ifset
139 @ifset ARM
140 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141 @end ifset
142 @ifset M68HC11
143 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144 @end ifset
145 @ifset HPPA
146 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147 @end ifset
148 @ifset M68K
149 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150 @end ifset
151 @ifset MIPS
152 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153 @end ifset
154 @ifset POWERPC
155 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156 @end ifset
157 @ifset POWERPC64
158 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159 @end ifset
160 @ifset S/390
161 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162 @end ifset
163 @ifset SPU
164 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165 @end ifset
166 @ifset TICOFF
167 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168 @end ifset
169 @ifset WIN32
170 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171 @end ifset
172 @ifset XTENSA
173 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174 @end ifset
175 @end ifclear
176 @ifclear SingleFormat
177 * BFD:: BFD
178 @end ifclear
179 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
183 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
184 * LD Index:: LD Index
185 @end menu
186 @end ifnottex
187
188 @node Overview
189 @chapter Overview
190
191 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192 @cindex what is this?
193
194 @ifset man
195 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
196 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
197 @c man end
198
199 @c man begin SEEALSO
200 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202 @file{ld}.
203 @c man end
204 @end ifset
205
206 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
208 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
209 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
210 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
211
212 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
213 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
216 @ifset man
217 @c For the man only
218 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
219 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
221 @end ifset
222
223 @ifclear SingleFormat
224 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
226 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229 @end ifclear
230
231 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
234 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
235 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
237 @c man end
238
239 @node Invocation
240 @chapter Invocation
241
242 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
244 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
245 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246 you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
248 @c man end
249
250 @ifset UsesEnvVars
251 @menu
252 * Options:: Command-line Options
253 * Environment:: Environment Variables
254 @end menu
255
256 @node Options
257 @section Command-line Options
258 @end ifset
259
260 @cindex command line
261 @cindex options
262
263 @c man begin OPTIONS
264
265 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267 @cindex standard Unix system
268 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
269 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270 link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272 @smallexample
273 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274 @end smallexample
275
276 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
277 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
281 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
282 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
287 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289 noted in the descriptions below.
290
291 @cindex object files
292 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295 an option and its argument.
296
297 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301 message @samp{No input files}.
302
303 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
304 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
309 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
314
315 For options whose names are a single letter,
316 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318 option that requires them.
319
320 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
321 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
322 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
323 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
324 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
325 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327 output.
328
329 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334 accepted.
335
336 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
337 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
338 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339 compiler driver) like this:
340
341 @smallexample
342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
343 @end smallexample
344
345 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
346 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353 @smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355 @end smallexample
356
357 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
358 linker:
359
360 @table @gcctabopt
361 @include at-file.texi
362
363 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
364 @item -a @var{keyword}
365 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
371 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
378 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
379 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
380 interface.
381
382 @ifclear SingleFormat
383 @cindex binary input format
384 @kindex -b @var{format}
385 @kindex --format=@var{format}
386 @cindex input format
387 @cindex input format
388 @item -b @var{input-format}
389 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
390 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
392 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
393 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
394 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
395 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
396 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400 @xref{BFD}.
401
402 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404 linking object files of different formats), by including
405 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
406 particular format.
407
408 The default format is taken from the environment variable
409 @code{GNUTARGET}.
410 @ifset UsesEnvVars
411 @xref{Environment}.
412 @end ifset
413 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
414 @code{TARGET};
415 @ifclear man
416 see @ref{Format Commands}.
417 @end ifclear
418 @end ifclear
419
420 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422 @cindex compatibility, MRI
423 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
425 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
426 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
427 @ifclear man
428 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429 @end ifclear
430 @ifset man
431 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432 @end ifset
433 Introduce MRI script files with
434 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
435 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
437 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439 @cindex common allocation
440 @kindex -d
441 @kindex -dc
442 @kindex -dp
443 @item -d
444 @itemx -dc
445 @itemx -dp
446 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
452 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
461 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
462
463 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465 This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466 fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467 section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468 error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469 several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470 section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471 sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473 @smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492 @end smallexample
493
494 This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495 the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499 This option enables warnings when
500 @code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501 matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502 discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503 output region.
504
505 @cindex entry point, from command line
506 @kindex -e @var{entry}
507 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
508 @item -e @var{entry}
509 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
518 @kindex --exclude-libs
519 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
521 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
522 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527 be treated as hidden.
528
529 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540 regardless of this option.
541
542 @cindex dynamic symbol table
543 @kindex -E
544 @kindex --export-dynamic
545 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
546 @item -E
547 @itemx --export-dynamic
548 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
549 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
558
559 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562 linking the program itself.
563
564 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
565 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
566 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
567
568 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
572 @ifclear SingleFormat
573 @cindex big-endian objects
574 @cindex endianness
575 @kindex -EB
576 @item -EB
577 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
578
579 @cindex little-endian objects
580 @kindex -EL
581 @item -EL
582 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
583 @end ifclear
584
585 @kindex -f @var{name}
586 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
587 @item -f @var{name}
588 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
589 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
590 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
591 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
592 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593
594 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
595 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
596 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
597 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
598 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
599 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
600 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
601 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
602 machine-specific performance.
603
604 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
605 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
606
607 @kindex -F @var{name}
608 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
609 @item -F @var{name}
610 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
611 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
612 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
613 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
614 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
615
616 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
617 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
618 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
619 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
620 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
621 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
622 @var{name}.
623
624 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
625 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
626 object files.
627 @ifclear SingleFormat
628 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
629 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
630 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
631 environment variable.
632 @end ifclear
633 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
634 creating an ELF shared object.
635
636 @cindex finalization function
637 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
638 @item -fini=@var{name}
639 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
640 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
641 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
642 the function to call.
643
644 @kindex -g
645 @item -g
646 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
647
648 @kindex -G @var{value}
649 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
650 @cindex object size
651 @item -G @var{value}
652 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
653 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
654 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
655 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
656 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
657
658 @cindex runtime library name
659 @kindex -h @var{name}
660 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
661 @item -h @var{name}
662 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
663 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
664 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
665 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
666 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
667 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
668
669 @kindex -i
670 @cindex incremental link
671 @item -i
672 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
673
674 @cindex initialization function
675 @kindex -init=@var{name}
676 @item -init=@var{name}
677 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
678 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
679 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
680 function to call.
681
682 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
683 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
684 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
685 @item -l @var{namespec}
686 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
687 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
688 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
689 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
690 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
691 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
692
693 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
694 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
695 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
696 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
697 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
698 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
699 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
700 @var{filename}.
701
702 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
703 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
704 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
705 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
706 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
707 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
708
709 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
710 archives multiple times.
711
712 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
713
714 @ifset GENERIC
715 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
716 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
717 behaviour of the AIX linker.
718 @end ifset
719
720 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
721 @kindex -L @var{dir}
722 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
723 @item -L @var{searchdir}
724 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
725 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
726 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
727 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
728 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
729 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
730 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
731 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
732 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
733 option is specified.
734
735 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
736 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
737 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
738
739 @ifset UsesEnvVars
740 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
741 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
742 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
743 @end ifset
744
745 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
746 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
747 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
748
749 @cindex emulation
750 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
751 @item -m @var{emulation}
752 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
753 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
754
755 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
756 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
757
758 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
759 configured.
760
761 @cindex link map
762 @kindex -M
763 @kindex --print-map
764 @item -M
765 @itemx --print-map
766 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
767 information about the link, including the following:
768
769 @itemize @bullet
770 @item
771 Where object files are mapped into memory.
772 @item
773 How common symbols are allocated.
774 @item
775 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
776 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
777 @item
778 The values assigned to symbols.
779
780 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
781 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
782 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
783 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
784 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
785 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
786 linker script containing:
787
788 @smallexample
789 foo = 1
790 foo = foo * 4
791 foo = foo + 8
792 @end smallexample
793
794 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
795 option is used:
796
797 @smallexample
798 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
800 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
801 @end smallexample
802
803 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
804 scripts.
805
806 @item
807 How GNU properties are merged.
808
809 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
810 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
811 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
812
813 @smallexample
814 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
815 @end smallexample
816
817 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
818 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
819 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
820
821 @smallexample
822 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
823 @end smallexample
824
825 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
826 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
827 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
828 @end itemize
829
830 @cindex link map discarded
831 @kindex --print-map-discarded
832 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
833 @item --print-map-discarded
834 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
835 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
836 in the link map. Enabled by default.
837
838 @kindex -n
839 @cindex read-only text
840 @cindex NMAGIC
841 @kindex --nmagic
842 @item -n
843 @itemx --nmagic
844 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
845 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
846 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
847
848 @kindex -N
849 @kindex --omagic
850 @cindex read/write from cmd line
851 @cindex OMAGIC
852 @item -N
853 @itemx --omagic
854 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
855 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
856 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
857 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
858 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
859 specification published by Microsoft.
860
861 @kindex --no-omagic
862 @cindex OMAGIC
863 @item --no-omagic
864 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
865 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
866 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
867 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
868
869 @kindex -o @var{output}
870 @kindex --output=@var{output}
871 @cindex naming the output file
872 @item -o @var{output}
873 @itemx --output=@var{output}
874 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
875 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
876 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
877
878 @kindex -O @var{level}
879 @cindex generating optimized output
880 @item -O @var{level}
881 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
882 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
883 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
884 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
885 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
886 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
887 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
888
889 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
890 @item -plugin @var{name}
891 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
892 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
893 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
894 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
895 wish.
896
897 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
898 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
899 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
900 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
901 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
902 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
903 just copy in the newest one.
904
905 @kindex --push-state
906 @cindex push state governing input file handling
907 @item --push-state
908 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
909 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
910 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
911
912 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
913 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
914 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
915 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
916 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
917 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
918
919 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
920 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
921 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
922 something as follows:
923
924 @smallexample
925 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
926 @end smallexample
927
928 @kindex --pop-state
929 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
930 @item --pop-state
931 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
932 flags governing input file handling.
933
934 @kindex -q
935 @kindex --emit-relocs
936 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
937 @item -q
938 @itemx --emit-relocs
939 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
940 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
941 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
942 in larger executables.
943
944 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
945
946 @kindex --force-dynamic
947 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
948 @item --force-dynamic
949 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
950 to VxWorks targets.
951
952 @cindex partial link
953 @cindex relocatable output
954 @kindex -r
955 @kindex --relocatable
956 @item -r
957 @itemx --relocatable
958 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
959 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
960 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
961 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
962 @code{OMAGIC}.
963 @c ; see @option{-N}.
964 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
965 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
966 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
967
968 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
969 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
970 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
971 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
972 with input files in other formats at all.
973
974 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
975
976 @kindex -R @var{file}
977 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
978 @cindex symbol-only input
979 @item -R @var{filename}
980 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
981 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
982 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
983 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
984 programs. You may use this option more than once.
985
986 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
987 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
988 the @option{-rpath} option.
989
990 @kindex -s
991 @kindex --strip-all
992 @cindex strip all symbols
993 @item -s
994 @itemx --strip-all
995 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
996
997 @kindex -S
998 @kindex --strip-debug
999 @cindex strip debugger symbols
1000 @item -S
1001 @itemx --strip-debug
1002 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1003
1004 @kindex --strip-discarded
1005 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
1006 @item --strip-discarded
1007 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
1008 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1009 Enabled by default.
1010
1011 @kindex -t
1012 @kindex --trace
1013 @cindex input files, displaying
1014 @item -t
1015 @itemx --trace
1016 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1017 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1018 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1019 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1020 a linker bug report.
1021
1022 @kindex -T @var{script}
1023 @kindex --script=@var{script}
1024 @cindex script files
1025 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
1026 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1027 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
1028 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
1029 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
1030 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1031 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1032 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1033 options accumulate.
1034
1035 @kindex -dT @var{script}
1036 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1037 @cindex script files
1038 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1039 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1040 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1041
1042 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1043 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1044 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1045 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1046 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1047 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1048 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1049 @samp{gcc}).
1050
1051 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1052 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1053 @cindex undefined symbol
1054 @item -u @var{symbol}
1055 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1056 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1057 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1058 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1059 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1060 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1061
1062 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1063 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1064 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1065 instead.
1066
1067 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1068 @cindex symbols, require defined
1069 @cindex defined symbol
1070 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1071 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1072 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1073 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1074 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1075 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1076 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1077
1078 @kindex -Ur
1079 @cindex constructors
1080 @item -Ur
1081 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1082 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1083 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1084 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1085 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1086 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1087 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1088 @samp{-r} for the others.
1089
1090 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1091 @cindex orphan sections
1092 @cindex sections, orphan
1093 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1094 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1095 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1096
1097 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1098
1099 @table @code
1100 @item place
1101 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1102 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1103 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1104
1105 @item discard
1106 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1107 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1108
1109 @item warn
1110 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1111 issue a warning.
1112
1113 @item error
1114 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1115 @end table
1116
1117 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1118
1119 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1121 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1122 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1123 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1124 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1125 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1126 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1127 in a linker script.
1128
1129 @kindex -v
1130 @kindex -V
1131 @kindex --version
1132 @cindex version
1133 @item -v
1134 @itemx --version
1135 @itemx -V
1136 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1137 lists the supported emulations.
1138
1139 @kindex -x
1140 @kindex --discard-all
1141 @cindex deleting local symbols
1142 @item -x
1143 @itemx --discard-all
1144 Delete all local symbols.
1145
1146 @kindex -X
1147 @kindex --discard-locals
1148 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1149 @item -X
1150 @itemx --discard-locals
1151 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1152 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1153 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1154
1155 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1156 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1157 @cindex symbol tracing
1158 @item -y @var{symbol}
1159 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1160 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1161 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1162 to prepend an underscore.
1163
1164 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1165 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1166
1167 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1168 @item -Y @var{path}
1169 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1170 for Solaris compatibility.
1171
1172 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1173 @item -z @var{keyword}
1174 The recognized keywords are:
1175 @table @samp
1176
1177 @item bndplt
1178 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1179
1180 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1181 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1182 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1183 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1184 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1185 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1186 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1187 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1188 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1189 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1190 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1191
1192 @item cet-report=none
1193 @itemx cet-report=warning
1194 @itemx cet-report=error
1195 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1196 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1197 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1198 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1199 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1200 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1201 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1202 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1203 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1204 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1205 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1206
1207 @item combreloc
1208 @itemx nocombreloc
1209 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1210 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1211
1212 @item common
1213 @itemx nocommon
1214 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1215 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1216
1217 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1218 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1219 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1220 using pages of this size.
1221
1222 @item defs
1223 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1224 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1225 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1226
1227 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1228 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1229 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1230 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1231 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1232 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1233 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1234 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1235 these options.
1236
1237 @item execstack
1238 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1239
1240 @item global
1241 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1242 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1243 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1244
1245 @item globalaudit
1246 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1247 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1248 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1249 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1250 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1251 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1252
1253 @item ibtplt
1254 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1255 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1256
1257 @item ibt
1258 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1259 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1260 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1261
1262 @item initfirst
1263 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1264 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1265 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1266 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1267 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1268 objects.
1269
1270 @item interpose
1271 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1272 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1273 libraries not so marked.
1274
1275 @item lazy
1276 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1277 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1278 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1279 Lazy binding is the default.
1280
1281 @item loadfltr
1282 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1283
1284 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1285 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1286
1287 @item muldefs
1288 Allow multiple definitions.
1289
1290 @item nocopyreloc
1291 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1292 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1293
1294 @item nodefaultlib
1295 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1296 should ignore any default library search paths.
1297
1298 @item nodelete
1299 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1300
1301 @item nodlopen
1302 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1303
1304 @item nodump
1305 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1306
1307 @item noexecstack
1308 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1309
1310 @item noextern-protected-data
1311 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1312 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1313 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1314 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1315 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1316 i386 and x86-64.
1317
1318 @item noreloc-overflow
1319 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1320 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1321 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1322
1323 @item now
1324 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1325 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1326 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1327 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1328 called.
1329
1330 @item origin
1331 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1332
1333 @item relro
1334 @itemx norelro
1335 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1336 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1337 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1338 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1339 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1340
1341 @item separate-code
1342 @itemx noseparate-code
1343 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1344 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1345 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1346 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1347
1348 @item shstk
1349 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1350 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1351 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1352
1353 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1354 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1355 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1356 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1357
1358 @item text
1359 @itemx notext
1360 @itemx textoff
1361 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the position-independent
1362 or shared object has dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't
1363 report an error if @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1364
1365 @item undefs
1366 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1367 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1368 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1369
1370 @end table
1371
1372 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1373
1374 @kindex -(
1375 @cindex groups of archives
1376 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1377 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1378 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1379 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1380
1381 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1382 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1383 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1384 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1385 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1386 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1387 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1388 resolved.
1389
1390 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1391 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1392 more archives.
1393
1394 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1395 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1396 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1397 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1398 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1399 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1400 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1401 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1402 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1403 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1404 restore the old behaviour.
1405
1406 @kindex --as-needed
1407 @kindex --no-as-needed
1408 @item --as-needed
1409 @itemx --no-as-needed
1410 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1411 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1412 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1413 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1414 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1415 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1416 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1417 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1418 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1419 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1420 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1421 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1422 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1423
1424 @kindex --add-needed
1425 @kindex --no-add-needed
1426 @item --add-needed
1427 @itemx --no-add-needed
1428 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1429 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1430 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1431 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1432
1433 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1434 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1435 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1436
1437 @kindex -Bdynamic
1438 @kindex -dy
1439 @kindex -call_shared
1440 @item -Bdynamic
1441 @itemx -dy
1442 @itemx -call_shared
1443 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1444 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1445 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1446 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1447 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1448 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1449
1450 @kindex -Bgroup
1451 @item -Bgroup
1452 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1453 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1454 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1455 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1456 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1457
1458 @kindex -Bstatic
1459 @kindex -dn
1460 @kindex -non_shared
1461 @kindex -static
1462 @item -Bstatic
1463 @itemx -dn
1464 @itemx -non_shared
1465 @itemx -static
1466 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1467 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1468 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1469 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1470 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1471 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1472 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1473 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1474 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1475 libraries.
1476
1477 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1478 @item -Bsymbolic
1479 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1480 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1481 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1482 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1483 platforms which support shared libraries.
1484
1485 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1486 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1487 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1488 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1489 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1490 libraries.
1491
1492 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1494 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1495 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1496 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1497 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1498 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1499 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1500 which support shared libraries.
1501
1502 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1503 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1504
1505 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1506 @item --dynamic-list-data
1507 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1508
1509 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1511 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1512 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1513
1514 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1516 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1517
1518 @kindex --check-sections
1519 @kindex --no-check-sections
1520 @item --check-sections
1521 @itemx --no-check-sections
1522 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1523 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1524 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1525 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1526 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1527 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1528 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1529 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1530 option.
1531
1532 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1533 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1534 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1535 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1536 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1537 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1538 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1539 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1540 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1541 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1542 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1543 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1544
1545 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1546 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1547 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1548 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1549 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1550 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1551 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1552 symbols.
1553
1554 @cindex cross reference table
1555 @kindex --cref
1556 @item --cref
1557 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1558 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1559 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1560
1561 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1562 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1563 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1564 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1565 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1566 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1567 symbol are listed.
1568
1569 @cindex common allocation
1570 @kindex --no-define-common
1571 @item --no-define-common
1572 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1573 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1574 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1575
1576 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1577 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1578 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1579 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1580 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1581 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1582 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1583 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1584 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1585 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1586
1587 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1588 @cindex section groups
1589 @cindex COMDAT
1590 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1591 @item --force-group-allocation
1592 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1593 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1594 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1595 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1596 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1597 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1598
1599 @cindex symbols, from command line
1600 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1601 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1602 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1603 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1604 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1605 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1606 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1607 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1608 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1609 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1610 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1611 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1612
1613 @cindex demangling, from command line
1614 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1615 @kindex --no-demangle
1616 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1617 @itemx --no-demangle
1618 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1619 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1620 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1621 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1622 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1623 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1624 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1625 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1626 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1627
1628 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1629 @kindex -I@var{file}
1630 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1631 @item -I@var{file}
1632 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1633 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1634 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1635 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1636 doing.
1637
1638 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1639 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1640 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1641 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1642 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1643 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1644
1645 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1646 @item --embedded-relocs
1647 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1648 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1649 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1650 targets.
1651
1652 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1654 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1655 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1656
1657 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1658 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1659 @item --fatal-warnings
1660 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1661 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1662 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1663
1664 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1665 @item --force-exe-suffix
1666 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1667
1668 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1669 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1670 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1671 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1672 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1673 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1674
1675 @kindex --gc-sections
1676 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1677 @cindex garbage collection
1678 @item --gc-sections
1679 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1680 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1681 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1682 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1683 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1684 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1685 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1686
1687 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1688 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1689 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1690 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1691 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1692 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1693 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1694 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1695 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1696 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1697
1698 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1699 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1700 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1701 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1702 command in the linker script.
1703
1704 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1705 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1706 @cindex garbage collection
1707 @item --print-gc-sections
1708 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1709 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1710 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1711 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1712 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1713 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1714 line.
1715
1716 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1717 @cindex garbage collection
1718 @item --gc-keep-exported
1719 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1720 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1721 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1722 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1723 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1724 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1725 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1726 ELF format targets.
1727
1728 @kindex --print-output-format
1729 @cindex output format
1730 @item --print-output-format
1731 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1732 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1733 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1734
1735 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1736 @cindex memory usage
1737 @item --print-memory-usage
1738 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1739 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1740 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1741 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1742 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1743
1744 @smallexample
1745 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1746 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1747 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1748 @end smallexample
1749
1750 @cindex help
1751 @cindex usage
1752 @kindex --help
1753 @item --help
1754 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1755
1756 @kindex --target-help
1757 @item --target-help
1758 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1759
1760 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1762 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1763 @option{-M} option, above.
1764
1765 @cindex memory usage
1766 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1767 @item --no-keep-memory
1768 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1769 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1770 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1771 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1772 while linking a large executable.
1773
1774 @kindex --no-undefined
1775 @kindex -z defs
1776 @kindex -z undefs
1777 @item --no-undefined
1778 @itemx -z defs
1779 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1780 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1781 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1782 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1783 libraries being linked in.
1784
1785 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1786
1787 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1788 @kindex -z muldefs
1789 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1790 @itemx -z muldefs
1791 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1792 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1793 first definition will be used.
1794
1795 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1796 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1797 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1798 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1799 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1800 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1801 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1802 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1803 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1804
1805 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1806 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1807 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1808 a shared library.
1809
1810 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1811 libraries specified at link time are that:
1812
1813 @itemize @bullet
1814 @item
1815 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1816 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1817 resolvable at load time.
1818 @item
1819 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1820 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1821
1822 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1823 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1824 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1825 appropriate memset function.
1826 @end itemize
1827
1828 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1829 @item --no-undefined-version
1830 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1831 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1832 will be issued instead.
1833
1834 @kindex --default-symver
1835 @item --default-symver
1836 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1837 exported symbols.
1838
1839 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1840 @item --default-imported-symver
1841 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1842 imported symbols.
1843
1844 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1845 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1846 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1847 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1848 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1849 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1850 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1851 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1852 inappropriate.
1853
1854 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1855 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1856 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1857 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1858
1859 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1860 @item --no-whole-archive
1861 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1862 archive files.
1863
1864 @cindex output file after errors
1865 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1866 @item --noinhibit-exec
1867 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1868 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1869 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1870 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1871
1872 @kindex -nostdlib
1873 @item -nostdlib
1874 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1875 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1876 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1877
1878 @ifclear SingleFormat
1879 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1880 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1881 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1882 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1883 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1884 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1885 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1886 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1887 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1888 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1889 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1890 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1891 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1892 @end ifclear
1893
1894 @kindex --out-implib
1895 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1896 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1897 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1898 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1899 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1900 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1901 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1902 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1903
1904 @kindex -pie
1905 @kindex --pic-executable
1906 @item -pie
1907 @itemx --pic-executable
1908 @cindex position independent executables
1909 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1910 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1911 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1912 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1913 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1914 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1915
1916 @kindex -qmagic
1917 @item -qmagic
1918 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1919
1920 @kindex -Qy
1921 @item -Qy
1922 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1923
1924 @kindex --relax
1925 @cindex synthesizing linker
1926 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1927 @cindex --no-relax
1928 @item --relax
1929 @itemx --no-relax
1930 An option with machine dependent effects.
1931 @ifset GENERIC
1932 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1933 @end ifset
1934 @ifset H8300
1935 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1936 @end ifset
1937 @ifset XTENSA
1938 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1939 @end ifset
1940 @ifset M68HC11
1941 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1942 @end ifset
1943 @ifset NIOSII
1944 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1945 @end ifset
1946 @ifset POWERPC
1947 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1948 @end ifset
1949
1950 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1951 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1952 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1953 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1954 instructions, and combining constant values.
1955
1956 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1957 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1958 @ifset GENERIC
1959 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1960 family of processors.
1961 @end ifset
1962
1963 @ifset GENERIC
1964 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1965 but ignored.
1966 @end ifset
1967
1968 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1969 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1970
1971 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1972 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1973 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1974 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1975 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1976 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1977 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1978 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1979 @ifset GENERIC
1980 (such as VxWorks)
1981 @end ifset
1982 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1983 run-time memory.
1984
1985 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1986 or symbols needed for relocations.
1987
1988 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1989 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1990
1991 @ifset GENERIC
1992 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1993 @cindex runtime library search path
1994 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1995 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1996 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1997 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1998 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1999
2000 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2001 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2002 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2003 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2004 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2005
2006 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2007 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2008 is defined.
2009
2010 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
2011 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
2012 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2013 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2014 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2015 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
2016 file systems.
2017
2018 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
2019 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
2020 the @option{-rpath} option.
2021 @end ifset
2022
2023 @ifset GENERIC
2024 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
2025 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2026 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2027 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2028 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2029 of the input files.
2030
2031 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2032 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2033 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
2034 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
2035 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
2036 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
2037 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2038 appearing multiple times.
2039
2040 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2041 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2042 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2043 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2044 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2045
2046 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2047 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2048 supported.
2049
2050 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2051 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2052 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2053 runtime linker would do.
2054
2055 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2056 libraries:
2057
2058 @enumerate
2059 @item
2060 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2061 @item
2062 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2063 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2064 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2065 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2066 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2067 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2068 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2069 @item
2070 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2071 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2072 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2073 @item
2074 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2075 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2076 @item
2077 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2078 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2079 @item
2080 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2081 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2082 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2083 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2084 @item
2085 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2086 @item
2087 For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2088 exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2089 to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2090 defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2091 configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2092 @item
2093 For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2094 the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2095 header file.
2096 @item
2097 Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2098 linker script being used.
2099 @end enumerate
2100
2101 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2102 warning and continue with the link.
2103 @end ifset
2104
2105 @kindex -shared
2106 @kindex -Bshareable
2107 @item -shared
2108 @itemx -Bshareable
2109 @cindex shared libraries
2110 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2111 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2112 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2113 undefined symbols in the link.
2114
2115 @kindex --sort-common
2116 @item --sort-common
2117 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2118 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2119 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2120 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2121 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2122 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2123 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2124 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2125
2126 @kindex --sort-section=name
2127 @item --sort-section=name
2128 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2129 patterns in the linker script.
2130
2131 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2132 @item --sort-section=alignment
2133 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2134 patterns in the linker script.
2135
2136 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2137 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2138 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2139 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2140 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2141
2142 @kindex --split-by-file
2143 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2144 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2145 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2146 size of 1 if not given.
2147
2148 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2149 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2150 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2151 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2152 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2153 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2154 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2155 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2156 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2157 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2158 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2159 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2160
2161 @kindex --stats
2162 @item --stats
2163 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2164 as execution time and memory usage.
2165
2166 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2167 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2168 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2169 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2170 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2171
2172 @kindex --task-link
2173 @item --task-link
2174 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2175 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2176
2177 @kindex --traditional-format
2178 @cindex traditional format
2179 @item --traditional-format
2180 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2181 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2182 use the traditional format instead.
2183
2184 @cindex dbx
2185 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2186 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2187 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2188 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2189 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2190 combine duplicate entries.
2191
2192 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2193 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2194 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2195 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2196 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2197 line.
2198 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2199 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2200 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2201 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2202 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2203
2204 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2205 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2206 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2207 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2208 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2209 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2210 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2211 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2212 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2213
2214 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2215 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2216 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2217 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2218 byte of the text segment.
2219
2220 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2221 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2222 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2223 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2224 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2225 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2226
2227 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2228 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2229 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2230 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2231 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2232
2233 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2234 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2235 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2236 values for @samp{method}:
2237
2238 @table @samp
2239 @item ignore-all
2240 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2241
2242 @item report-all
2243 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2244
2245 @item ignore-in-object-files
2246 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2247 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2248
2249 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2250 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2251 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2252 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2253 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2254 command line.
2255 @end table
2256
2257 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2258 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2259
2260 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2261 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2262 can change this to a warning.
2263
2264 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2265 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2266 @item --dll-verbose
2267 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2268 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2269 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2270 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2271 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2272
2273 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2274 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2275 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2276 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2277 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2278 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2279 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2280 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2281 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2282 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2283 @xref{WIN32}.
2284
2285 @kindex --warn-common
2286 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2287 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2288 @item --warn-common
2289 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2290 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2291 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2292 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2293 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2294 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2295
2296 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2297
2298 @table @samp
2299 @item int i = 1;
2300 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2301 file.
2302
2303 @item extern int i;
2304 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2305 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2306 variable somewhere.
2307
2308 @item int i;
2309 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2310 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2311 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2312 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2313 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2314 a definition of the same variable.
2315 @end table
2316
2317 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2318 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2319 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2320 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2321 a common symbol.
2322
2323 @enumerate
2324 @item
2325 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2326 definition for the symbol.
2327 @smallexample
2328 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2329 overridden by definition
2330 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2331 @end smallexample
2332
2333 @item
2334 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2335 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2336 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2337 @smallexample
2338 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2339 overriding common
2340 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2341 @end smallexample
2342
2343 @item
2344 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2345 @smallexample
2346 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2347 of `@var{symbol}'
2348 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2349 @end smallexample
2350
2351 @item
2352 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2353 @smallexample
2354 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2355 overridden by larger common
2356 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2357 @end smallexample
2358
2359 @item
2360 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2361 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2362 encountered in a different order.
2363 @smallexample
2364 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2365 overriding smaller common
2366 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2367 @end smallexample
2368 @end enumerate
2369
2370 @kindex --warn-constructors
2371 @item --warn-constructors
2372 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2373 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2374 detect the use of global constructors.
2375
2376 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2377 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2378 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2379 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2380 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2381 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2382 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2383 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2384 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2385 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2386 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2387 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2388 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2389
2390 @kindex --warn-once
2391 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2392 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2393 @item --warn-once
2394 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2395 which refers to it.
2396
2397 @kindex --warn-section-align
2398 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2399 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2400 @item --warn-section-align
2401 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2402 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2403 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2404 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2405 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2406
2407 @kindex --warn-textrel
2408 @item --warn-textrel
2409 Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent executable
2410 or shared object.
2411
2412 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2413 @item --warn-alternate-em
2414 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2415
2416 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2417 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2418 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2419 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2420 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2421
2422 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2423 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2424 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2425 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2426
2427 @kindex --whole-archive
2428 @cindex including an entire archive
2429 @item --whole-archive
2430 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2431 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2432 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2433 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2434 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2435 library. This option may be used more than once.
2436
2437 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2438 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2439 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2440 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2441 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2442
2443 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2444 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2445 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2446 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2447 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2448 @var{symbol}.
2449
2450 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2451 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2452 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2453 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2454
2455 Here is a trivial example:
2456
2457 @smallexample
2458 void *
2459 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2460 @{
2461 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2462 return __real_malloc (c);
2463 @}
2464 @end smallexample
2465
2466 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2467 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2468 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2469 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2470
2471 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2472 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2473 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2474 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2475 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2476
2477 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2478 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2479 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2480 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2481
2482 @smallexample
2483 int
2484 f (void)
2485 @{
2486 return 123;
2487 @}
2488
2489 int
2490 g (void)
2491 @{
2492 return f();
2493 @}
2494 @end smallexample
2495
2496 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2497 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2498 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2499 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2500 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2501 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2502 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2503
2504 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2505 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2506 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2507 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2508 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2509
2510 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2511 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2512 @item --enable-new-dtags
2513 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2514 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2515 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2516 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2517 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2518 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2519 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2520 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2521
2522 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2523 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2524 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2525 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2526 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2527 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2528 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2529
2530 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2531 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2532 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2533 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2534 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2535 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2536 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2537 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2538
2539 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2540 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2541 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2542 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2543 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2544 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2545 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2546 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2547 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2548 compressed using zlib.
2549
2550 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2551 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2552 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2553 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2554 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2555 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2556
2557 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2558 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2559
2560 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2561 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2562 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2563 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2564
2565 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2566 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2567 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2568 @option{--help} option.
2569
2570 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2571 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2572 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2573 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2574 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2575 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2576
2577 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2578 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2579 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2580 has been used.
2581
2582 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2583 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2584
2585 @kindex --build-id
2586 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2587 @item --build-id
2588 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2589 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2590 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2591 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2592 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2593 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2594 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2595 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2596 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2597 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2598 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2599
2600 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2601 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2602 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2603 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2604 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2605 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2606
2607 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2608 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2609 @end table
2610
2611 @c man end
2612
2613 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2614
2615 @c man begin OPTIONS
2616
2617 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2618 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2619 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2620 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2621 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2622 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2623 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2624 object file).
2625
2626 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2627 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2628 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2629 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2630
2631 @table @gcctabopt
2632
2633 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2634 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2635 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2636 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2637 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639 @kindex --base-file
2640 @item --base-file @var{file}
2641 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2642 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2643 @file{dlltool}.
2644 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2645
2646 @kindex --dll
2647 @item --dll
2648 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2649 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2650 file.
2651 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2652
2653 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2654 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2655 @item --enable-long-section-names
2656 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2657 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2658 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2659 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2660 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2661 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2662 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2663 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2664 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2665 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2666 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2667 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2668 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2669 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2670 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2671 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2672 image and not stripping symbols.
2673 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2674
2675 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2676 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2677 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2678 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2679 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2680 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2681 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2682 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2683 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2684 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2685 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2686 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2687 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2688 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2689 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2690 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2691 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2692 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2693
2694 @kindex --leading-underscore
2695 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2696 @item --leading-underscore
2697 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2698 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2699 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2700 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2701
2702 @cindex DLLs, creating
2703 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2704 @item --export-all-symbols
2705 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2706 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2707 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2708 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2709 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2710 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2711 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2712 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2713 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2714 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2715 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2716 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2717 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2718 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2719 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2720 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2721 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2722 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2723 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2724 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2725 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2726 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2727 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2728
2729 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2730 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2731 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2732 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2733 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2734
2735 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2736 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2737 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2738 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
2740 @kindex --file-alignment
2741 @item --file-alignment
2742 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2743 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2744 512.
2745 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2746
2747 @cindex heap size
2748 @kindex --heap
2749 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2750 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2751 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2752 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2753 committed.
2754 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2755
2756 @cindex image base
2757 @kindex --image-base
2758 @item --image-base @var{value}
2759 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2760 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2761 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2762 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2763 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2764 for dlls.
2765 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2766
2767 @kindex --kill-at
2768 @item --kill-at
2769 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2770 symbols before they are exported.
2771 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2772
2773 @kindex --large-address-aware
2774 @item --large-address-aware
2775 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2776 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2777 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2778 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2779 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2780 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2781
2782 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2783 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2784 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2785 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2786 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2787 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2788 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2789
2790 @kindex --major-image-version
2791 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2792 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2793 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2794
2795 @kindex --major-os-version
2796 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2797 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2798 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2799
2800 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2801 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2802 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2803 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2804
2805 @kindex --minor-image-version
2806 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2807 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2808 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2809
2810 @kindex --minor-os-version
2811 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2812 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2813 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2814
2815 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2816 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2817 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2818 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2819
2820 @cindex DEF files, creating
2821 @cindex DLLs, creating
2822 @kindex --output-def
2823 @item --output-def @var{file}
2824 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2825 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2826 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2827 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2828 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2829 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2830
2831 @cindex DLLs, creating
2832 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2833 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2834 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2835 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2836 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2837 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2838 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2839 execution are avoided.
2840 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2841
2842 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2843 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2844 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2845 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2846 default.
2847 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2848
2849 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2850 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2851 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2852 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2853 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2854 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2855 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2856 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2857 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2858 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2859
2860 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2861 @item --enable-auto-import
2862 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2863 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2864 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2865 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2866
2867 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2868 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2869
2870 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2871 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2872 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2873
2874 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2875 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2876 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2877 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2878 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2879
2880 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2881 see this message:
2882
2883 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2884 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2885
2886 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2887 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2888 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2889 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2890 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2891 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2892 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2893 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2894 the warning, and exit.
2895
2896 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2897 data type of the exported variable:
2898
2899 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2900 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2901 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2902
2903 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2904 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2905 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2906 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2907
2908 @example
2909 extern type extern_array[];
2910 extern_array[1] -->
2911 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2912 @end example
2913
2914 or
2915
2916 @example
2917 extern type extern_array[];
2918 extern_array[1] -->
2919 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2920 @end example
2921
2922 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2923 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2924
2925 @example
2926 extern struct s extern_struct;
2927 extern_struct.field -->
2928 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2929 @end example
2930
2931 or
2932
2933 @example
2934 extern long long extern_ll;
2935 extern_ll -->
2936 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2937 @end example
2938
2939 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2940 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2941 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2942 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2943 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2944 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2945 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2946 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2947
2948 Original:
2949 @example
2950 --foo.h
2951 extern int arr[];
2952 --foo.c
2953 #include "foo.h"
2954 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2955 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2956 @}
2957 @end example
2958
2959 Solution 1:
2960 @example
2961 --foo.h
2962 extern int arr[];
2963 --foo.c
2964 #include "foo.h"
2965 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2966 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2967 volatile int *parr = arr;
2968 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2969 @}
2970 @end example
2971
2972 Solution 2:
2973 @example
2974 --foo.h
2975 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2976 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2977 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2978 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2979 #else
2980 #define FOO_IMPORT
2981 #endif
2982 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2983 --foo.c
2984 #include "foo.h"
2985 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2986 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2987 @}
2988 @end example
2989
2990 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2991 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2992 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2993 functions).
2994
2995 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2996 @item --disable-auto-import
2997 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2998 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2999 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3000
3001 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3002 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3003 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3004 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3005 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
3006 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
3007 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3008
3009 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3010 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3011 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
3012 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3013
3014 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3015 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3016 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
3017 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3018
3019 @kindex --section-alignment
3020 @item --section-alignment
3021 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3022 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
3023 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3024
3025 @cindex stack size
3026 @kindex --stack
3027 @item --stack @var{reserve}
3028 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
3029 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
3030 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
3031 committed.
3032 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3033
3034 @kindex --subsystem
3035 @item --subsystem @var{which}
3036 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3037 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3038 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3039 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
3040 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3041 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3042 @var{which}.
3043 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3044
3045 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3046 of the PE file header:
3047 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3048
3049 @kindex --high-entropy-va
3050 @item --high-entropy-va
3051 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3052 (ASLR).
3053 This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3054 @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3055
3056 @kindex --dynamicbase
3057 @item --dynamicbase
3058 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3059 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3060 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3061 This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3062
3063 @kindex --forceinteg
3064 @item --forceinteg
3065 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3066
3067 @kindex --nxcompat
3068 @item --nxcompat
3069 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3070 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3071
3072 @kindex --no-isolation
3073 @item --no-isolation
3074 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3075
3076 @kindex --no-seh
3077 @item --no-seh
3078 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3079 this image.
3080
3081 @kindex --no-bind
3082 @item --no-bind
3083 Do not bind this image.
3084
3085 @kindex --wdmdriver
3086 @item --wdmdriver
3087 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3088
3089 @kindex --tsaware
3090 @item --tsaware
3091 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3092
3093 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3094 @item --insert-timestamp
3095 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3096 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3097 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3098 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3099 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3100 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3101 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3102 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3103 identically.
3104
3105 @kindex --enable-reloc-section
3106 @item --enable-reloc-section
3107 Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3108 is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
3109 @end table
3110
3111 @c man end
3112
3113 @ifset C6X
3114 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3115
3116 @c man begin OPTIONS
3117
3118 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3119 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3120 all executables use an index of 0.
3121
3122 @table @gcctabopt
3123
3124 @kindex --dsbt-size
3125 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3126 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3127 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3128 entries.
3129
3130 @kindex --dsbt-index
3131 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3132 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3133 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3134 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3135 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3136
3137 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3138 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3139 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3140
3141 @end table
3142
3143 @c man end
3144 @end ifset
3145
3146 @ifset CSKY
3147 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3148
3149 @c man begin OPTIONS
3150
3151 @table @gcctabopt
3152
3153 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3154 @item --branch-stub
3155 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3156 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3157 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3158 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3159 the compiler or assembler.
3160
3161 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3162 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3163 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3164 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3165 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3166 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3167 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3168 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3169 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3170
3171 @end table
3172
3173 @c man end
3174 @end ifset
3175
3176 @ifset M68HC11
3177 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3178
3179 @c man begin OPTIONS
3180
3181 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3182 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3183
3184 @table @gcctabopt
3185
3186 @kindex --no-trampoline
3187 @item --no-trampoline
3188 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3189 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3190 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3191
3192 @kindex --bank-window
3193 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3194 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3195 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3196 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3197 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3198
3199 @end table
3200
3201 @c man end
3202 @end ifset
3203
3204 @ifset M68K
3205 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3206
3207 @c man begin OPTIONS
3208
3209 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3210 when linking for 68K targets.
3211
3212 @table @gcctabopt
3213
3214 @kindex --got
3215 @item --got=@var{type}
3216 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3217 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3218 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3219 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3220
3221 @end table
3222
3223 @c man end
3224 @end ifset
3225
3226 @ifset MIPS
3227 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3228
3229 @c man begin OPTIONS
3230
3231 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3232 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3233 linking for MIPS targets.
3234
3235 @table @gcctabopt
3236
3237 @kindex --insn32
3238 @item --insn32
3239 @kindex --no-insn32
3240 @itemx --no-insn32
3241 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3242 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3243 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3244 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3245 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3246 possible.
3247
3248 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3249 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3250 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3251 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3252 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3253 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3254 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3255 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3256 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3257 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3258 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3259 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3260 an error.
3261
3262 @kindex --compact-branches
3263 @item --compact-branches
3264 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3265 @itemx --no-compact-branches
3266 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3267 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3268
3269 @end table
3270
3271 @c man end
3272 @end ifset
3273
3274
3275 @ifset PDP11
3276 @subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3277
3278 @c man begin OPTIONS
3279
3280 For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3281 produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3282 for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3283 targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3284 defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3285 here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3286
3287 @table @gcctabopt
3288
3289 @kindex -N
3290 @item -N
3291 @kindex --omagic
3292 @itemx --omagic
3293
3294 Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3295 indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3296 shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3297 writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3298 the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3299 programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3300 from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3301
3302 @kindex -n
3303 @item -n
3304 @kindex --nmagic
3305 @itemx --nmagic
3306
3307 Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3308 indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3309 be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3310 file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3311 byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3312 a @emph{pure executable} format.
3313
3314 @kindex -z
3315 @item -z
3316 @kindex --imagic
3317 @itemx --imagic
3318
3319 Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3320 indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3321 data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3322 instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3323 larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3324 to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3325 shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3326 option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3327 and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3328 this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3329 executable} format.
3330
3331 @kindex --no-omagic
3332 @item --no-omagic
3333
3334 Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3335
3336 @end table
3337
3338 @c man end
3339 @end ifset
3340
3341 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3342 @node Environment
3343 @section Environment Variables
3344
3345 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3346
3347 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3348 @ifclear SingleFormat
3349 @code{GNUTARGET},
3350 @end ifclear
3351 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3352
3353 @ifclear SingleFormat
3354 @kindex GNUTARGET
3355 @cindex default input format
3356 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3357 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3358 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3359 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3360 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3361 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3362 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3363 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3364 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3365 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3366 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3367 @end ifclear
3368
3369 @kindex LDEMULATION
3370 @cindex default emulation
3371 @cindex emulation, default
3372 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3373 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3374 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3375 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3376 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3377 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3378 linker was configured.
3379
3380 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3381 @cindex demangling, default
3382 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3383 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3384 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3385 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3386 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3387 options.
3388
3389 @c man end
3390 @end ifset
3391
3392 @node Scripts
3393 @chapter Linker Scripts
3394
3395 @cindex scripts
3396 @cindex linker scripts
3397 @cindex command files
3398 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3399 written in the linker command language.
3400
3401 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3402 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3403 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3404 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3405 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3406 described below.
3407
3408 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3409 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3410 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3411 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3412 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3413
3414 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3415 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3416 default linker script.
3417
3418 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3419 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3420 Linker Scripts}.
3421
3422 @menu
3423 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3424 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3425 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3426 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3427 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3428 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3429 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3430 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3431 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3432 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3433 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3434 @end menu
3435
3436 @node Basic Script Concepts
3437 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3438 @cindex linker script concepts
3439 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3440 describe the linker script language.
3441
3442 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3443 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3444 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3445 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3446 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3447 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3448 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3449 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3450
3451 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3452 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3453 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3454 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3455 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3456 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3457 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3458 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3459 of debugging information.
3460
3461 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3462 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3463 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3464 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3465 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3466 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3467 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3468 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3469 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3470 RAM address would be the VMA.
3471
3472 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3473 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3474
3475 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3476 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3477 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3478 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3479 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3480 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3481 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3482
3483 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3484 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3485 option.
3486
3487 @node Script Format
3488 @section Linker Script Format
3489 @cindex linker script format
3490 Linker scripts are text files.
3491
3492 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3493 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3494 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3495 generally ignored.
3496
3497 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3498 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3499 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3500 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3501 file name.
3502
3503 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3504 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3505 to whitespace.
3506
3507 @node Simple Example
3508 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3509 @cindex linker script example
3510 @cindex example of linker script
3511 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3512
3513 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3514 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3515 memory layout of the output file.
3516
3517 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3518 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3519 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3520 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3521 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3522 your input files.
3523
3524 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3525 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3526 linker script which will do that:
3527 @smallexample
3528 SECTIONS
3529 @{
3530 . = 0x10000;
3531 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3532 . = 0x8000000;
3533 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3534 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3535 @}
3536 @end smallexample
3537
3538 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3539 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3540 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3541
3542 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3543 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3544 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3545 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3546 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3547 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3548 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3549
3550 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3551 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3552 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3553 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3554 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3555 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3556
3557 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3558 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3559 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3560
3561 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3562 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3563 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3564 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3565 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3566 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3567 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3568
3569 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3570 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3571 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3572 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3573 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3574 sections.
3575
3576 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3577
3578 @node Simple Commands
3579 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3580 @cindex linker script simple commands
3581 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3582
3583 @menu
3584 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3585 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3586 @ifclear SingleFormat
3587 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3588 @end ifclear
3589
3590 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3591 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3592 @end menu
3593
3594 @node Entry Point
3595 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3596 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3597 @cindex start of execution
3598 @cindex first instruction
3599 @cindex entry point
3600 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3601 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3602 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3603 @smallexample
3604 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3605 @end smallexample
3606
3607 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3608 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3609 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3610 @itemize @bullet
3611 @item
3612 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3613 @item
3614 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3615 @item
3616 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3617 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3618 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3619 @item
3620 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3621 @item
3622 The address @code{0}.
3623 @end itemize
3624
3625 @node File Commands
3626 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3627 @cindex linker script file commands
3628 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3629
3630 @table @code
3631 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3632 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3633 @cindex including a linker script
3634 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3635 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3636 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3637 10 levels deep.
3638
3639 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3640 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3641
3642 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3643 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3644 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3645 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3646 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3647 @cindex linker script input object files
3648 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3649 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3650
3651 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3652 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3653 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3654
3655 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3656 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3657
3658 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3659 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3660 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3661 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
3662 @code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
3663 filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
3664 @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3665
3666 If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
3667 the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
3668 found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
3669 not found the linker will search through the archive library search
3670 path.
3671
3672 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3673 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3674 @samp{-l}.
3675
3676 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3677 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3678 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3679
3680 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3681 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3682 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3683 @cindex grouping input files
3684 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3685 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3686 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3687 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3688
3689 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3690 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3691 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3692 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3693 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3694 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3695 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3696 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3697 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3698 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3699 setting afterwards.
3700
3701 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3702 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3703 @cindex output file name in linker script
3704 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3705 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3706 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3707 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3708 precedence.
3709
3710 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3711 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3712
3713 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3714 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3715 @cindex library search path in linker script
3716 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3717 @cindex search path in linker script
3718 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3719 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3720 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3721 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3722 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3723 the command-line option are searched first.
3724
3725 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3726 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3727 @cindex first input file
3728 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3729 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3730 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3731 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3732 first file.
3733 @end table
3734
3735 @ifclear SingleFormat
3736 @node Format Commands
3737 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3738 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3739
3740 @table @code
3741 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3742 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3743 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3744 @cindex output file format in linker script
3745 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3746 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3747 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3748 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3749 line option takes precedence.
3750
3751 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3752 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3753 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3754 desired endianness.
3755
3756 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3757 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3758 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3759 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3760
3761 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3762 command:
3763 @smallexample
3764 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3765 @end smallexample
3766 This says that the default format for the output file is
3767 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3768 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3769 format.
3770
3771 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3772 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3773 @cindex input file format in linker script
3774 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3775 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3776 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3777 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3778 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3779 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3780 @end table
3781 @end ifclear
3782
3783 @node REGION_ALIAS
3784 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3785 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3786 @cindex region alias
3787 @cindex region names
3788
3789 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3790 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3791
3792 @smallexample
3793 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3794 @end smallexample
3795
3796 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3797 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3798 to memory regions. An example follows.
3799
3800 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3801 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3802 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3803 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3804 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3805 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3806 sections:
3807
3808 @itemize @bullet
3809 @item
3810 @code{.text} program code;
3811 @item
3812 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3813 @item
3814 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3815 @item
3816 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3817 @end itemize
3818
3819 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3820 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3821 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3822 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3823 @code{C}:
3824 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3825 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3826 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3827 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3828 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3829 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3830 @end multitable
3831 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3832 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3833 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3834 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3835
3836 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3837 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3838 memory layout:
3839 @smallexample
3840 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3841
3842 SECTIONS
3843 @{
3844 .text :
3845 @{
3846 *(.text)
3847 @} > REGION_TEXT
3848 .rodata :
3849 @{
3850 *(.rodata)
3851 rodata_end = .;
3852 @} > REGION_RODATA
3853 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3854 @{
3855 data_start = .;
3856 *(.data)
3857 @} > REGION_DATA
3858 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3859 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3860 .bss :
3861 @{
3862 *(.bss)
3863 @} > REGION_BSS
3864 @}
3865 @end smallexample
3866
3867 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3868 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3869 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3870 @table @code
3871 @item A
3872 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3873 @smallexample
3874 MEMORY
3875 @{
3876 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3877 @}
3878
3879 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3880 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3881 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3882 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3883 @end smallexample
3884 @item B
3885 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3886 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3887 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3888 @smallexample
3889 MEMORY
3890 @{
3891 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3892 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3893 @}
3894
3895 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3896 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3897 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3898 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3899 @end smallexample
3900 @item C
3901 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3902 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3903 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3904 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3905 @smallexample
3906 MEMORY
3907 @{
3908 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3909 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3910 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3911 @}
3912
3913 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3914 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3915 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3916 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3917 @end smallexample
3918 @end table
3919
3920 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3921 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3922 necessary:
3923 @smallexample
3924 #include <string.h>
3925
3926 extern char data_start [];
3927 extern char data_size [];
3928 extern char data_load_start [];
3929
3930 void copy_data(void)
3931 @{
3932 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3933 @{
3934 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3935 @}
3936 @}
3937 @end smallexample
3938
3939 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3940 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3941 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3942
3943 @table @code
3944 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3945 @kindex ASSERT
3946 @cindex assertion in linker script
3947 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3948 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3949
3950 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3951 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3952 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3953 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3954 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3955
3956 @smallexample
3957 .stack :
3958 @{
3959 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3960 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3961 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3962 @}
3963 @end smallexample
3964
3965 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3966 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3967 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3968
3969 @smallexample
3970 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3971 .stack :
3972 @{
3973 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3974 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3975 @}
3976 @end smallexample
3977
3978 will work.
3979
3980 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3981 @kindex EXTERN
3982 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3983 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3984 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3985 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3986 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3987 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3988
3989 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3990 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3991 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3992 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3993 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3994 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3995
3996 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3997 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3998 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3999 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
4000 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
4001 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
4002
4003 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4004 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4005 @cindex group allocation in linker script
4006 @cindex section groups
4007 @cindex COMDAT
4008 This command has the same effect as the
4009 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4010 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4011 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4012 specified (@samp{-r}).
4013
4014 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4015 @kindex INSERT
4016 @cindex insert user script into default script
4017 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4018 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4019 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4020 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4021 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4022 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4023 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4024 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4025 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4026 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4027 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4028 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4029 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4030
4031 @smallexample
4032 SECTIONS
4033 @{
4034 OVERLAY :
4035 @{
4036 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4037 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4038 @}
4039 @}
4040 INSERT AFTER .text;
4041 @end smallexample
4042
4043 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4044 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4045 @cindex cross references
4046 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4047 references among certain output sections.
4048
4049 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4050 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4051 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4052 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4053 a function defined in the other section.
4054
4055 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
4056 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
4057 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4058 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4059 names.
4060
4061 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4062 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4063 @cindex cross references
4064 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4065 references to one section from a list of other sections.
4066
4067 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4068 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4069 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4070 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4071 must never call back.
4072
4073 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4074 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4075 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4076 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4077 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4078 names, not input section names.
4079
4080 @ifclear SingleFormat
4081 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4082 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4083 @cindex machine architecture
4084 @cindex architecture
4085 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4086 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4087 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4088 the @samp{-f} option.
4089 @end ifclear
4090
4091 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4092 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4093 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4094 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4095 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4096 @xref{Expression Section}.
4097 @end table
4098
4099 @node Assignments
4100 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
4101 @cindex assignment in scripts
4102 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
4103 @cindex variables, defining
4104 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
4105 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
4106
4107 @menu
4108 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
4109 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
4110 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
4111 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4112 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
4113 @end menu
4114
4115 @node Simple Assignments
4116 @subsection Simple Assignments
4117
4118 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4119
4120 @table @code
4121 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4122 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4123 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4124 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4125 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4126 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4127 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4128 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4129 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4130 @end table
4131
4132 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4133 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4134 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4135
4136 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4137 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4138
4139 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4140
4141 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4142
4143 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4144 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4145 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4146
4147 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4148 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4149
4150 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4151 assignments may be used:
4152
4153 @smallexample
4154 floating_point = 0;
4155 SECTIONS
4156 @{
4157 .text :
4158 @{
4159 *(.text)
4160 _etext = .;
4161 @}
4162 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4163 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4164 @}
4165 @end smallexample
4166 @noindent
4167 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4168 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4169 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4170 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4171 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4172
4173 @node HIDDEN
4174 @subsection HIDDEN
4175 @cindex HIDDEN
4176 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4177 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4178
4179 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4180 @code{HIDDEN}:
4181
4182 @smallexample
4183 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4184 SECTIONS
4185 @{
4186 .text :
4187 @{
4188 *(.text)
4189 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4190 @}
4191 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4192 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4193 @}
4194 @end smallexample
4195 @noindent
4196 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4197
4198 @node PROVIDE
4199 @subsection PROVIDE
4200 @cindex PROVIDE
4201 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4202 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4203 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4204 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4205 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4206 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4207 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4208 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4209
4210 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4211 @smallexample
4212 SECTIONS
4213 @{
4214 .text :
4215 @{
4216 *(.text)
4217 _etext = .;
4218 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4219 @}
4220 @}
4221 @end smallexample
4222
4223 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4224 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4225 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4226 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4227 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4228 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4229
4230 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4231 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4232 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4233 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4234 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4235
4236 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4237 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4238 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4239 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4240 hidden and won't be exported.
4241
4242 @node Source Code Reference
4243 @subsection Source Code Reference
4244
4245 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4246 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4247 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4248 symbol that does not have a value.
4249
4250 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4251 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4252 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4253 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4254 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4255 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4256 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4257 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4258
4259 @smallexample
4260 extern int foo;
4261 @end smallexample
4262
4263 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4264
4265 @smallexample
4266 _foo = 1000;
4267 @end smallexample
4268
4269 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4270 transformation has taken place.
4271
4272 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4273 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4274 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4275 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4276 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4277 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4278 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4279
4280 @smallexample
4281 int foo = 1000;
4282 @end smallexample
4283
4284 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4285 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4286 number 1000 is initially stored.
4287
4288 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4289 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4290 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4291 So:
4292
4293 @smallexample
4294 foo = 1;
4295 @end smallexample
4296
4297 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4298 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4299 address. Whereas:
4300
4301 @smallexample
4302 int * a = & foo;
4303 @end smallexample
4304
4305 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4306 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4307 the variable @samp{a}.
4308
4309 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4310 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4311 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4312
4313 @smallexample
4314 foo = 1000;
4315 @end smallexample
4316
4317 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4318 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4319 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4320 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4321 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4322
4323 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4324 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4325 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4326 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4327 linker script contains these declarations:
4328
4329 @smallexample
4330 @group
4331 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4332 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4333 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4334 @end group
4335 @end smallexample
4336
4337 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4338
4339 @smallexample
4340 @group
4341 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4342
4343 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4344 @end group
4345 @end smallexample
4346
4347 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4348 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4349 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4350
4351 @smallexample
4352 @group
4353 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4354
4355 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4356 @end group
4357 @end smallexample
4358
4359 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4360 operators.
4361
4362 @node SECTIONS
4363 @section SECTIONS Command
4364 @kindex SECTIONS
4365 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4366 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4367
4368 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4369 @smallexample
4370 SECTIONS
4371 @{
4372 @var{sections-command}
4373 @var{sections-command}
4374 @dots{}
4375 @}
4376 @end smallexample
4377
4378 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4379
4380 @itemize @bullet
4381 @item
4382 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4383 @item
4384 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4385 @item
4386 an output section description
4387 @item
4388 an overlay description
4389 @end itemize
4390
4391 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4392 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4393 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4394 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4395 the layout of the output file.
4396
4397 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4398 below.
4399
4400 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4401 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4402 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4403 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4404 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4405 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4406
4407 @menu
4408 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4409 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4410 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4411 * Input Section:: Input section description
4412 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4413 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4414 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4415 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4416 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4417 @end menu
4418
4419 @node Output Section Description
4420 @subsection Output Section Description
4421 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4422 @smallexample
4423 @group
4424 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4425 [AT(@var{lma})]
4426 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4427 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4428 [@var{constraint}]
4429 @{
4430 @var{output-section-command}
4431 @var{output-section-command}
4432 @dots{}
4433 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4434 @end group
4435 @end smallexample
4436
4437 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4438
4439 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4440 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4441 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4442 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4443 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4444
4445 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4446
4447 @itemize @bullet
4448 @item
4449 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4450 @item
4451 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4452 @item
4453 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4454 @item
4455 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4456 @end itemize
4457
4458 @node Output Section Name
4459 @subsection Output Section Name
4460 @cindex name, section
4461 @cindex section name
4462 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4463 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4464 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4465 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4466 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4467 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4468 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4469 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4470 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4471 commas must be quoted.
4472
4473 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4474 Discarding}.
4475
4476 @node Output Section Address
4477 @subsection Output Section Address
4478 @cindex address, section
4479 @cindex section address
4480 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4481 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4482 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4483
4484 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4485 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4486 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4487 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4488 contained within the output section.
4489
4490 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4491
4492 @itemize @bullet
4493 @item
4494 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4495 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4496 in that region.
4497
4498 @item
4499 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4500 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4501 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4502 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4503
4504 @item
4505 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4506 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4507 counter.
4508 @end itemize
4509
4510 @noindent
4511 For example:
4512
4513 @smallexample
4514 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4515 @end smallexample
4516
4517 @noindent
4518 and
4519
4520 @smallexample
4521 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4522 @end smallexample
4523
4524 @noindent
4525 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4526 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4527 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4528 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4529 input sections.
4530
4531 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4532 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4533 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4534 do something like this:
4535 @smallexample
4536 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4537 @end smallexample
4538 @noindent
4539 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4540 aligned upward to the specified value.
4541
4542 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4543 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4544 sections are ignored).
4545
4546 @node Input Section
4547 @subsection Input Section Description
4548 @cindex input sections
4549 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4550 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4551
4552 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4553 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4554 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4555 map the input files into your memory layout.
4556
4557 @menu
4558 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4559 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4560 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4561 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4562 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4563 @end menu
4564
4565 @node Input Section Basics
4566 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4567 @cindex input section basics
4568 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4569 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4570
4571 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4572 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4573
4574 The most common input section description is to include all input
4575 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4576 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4577 @smallexample
4578 *(.text)
4579 @end smallexample
4580 @noindent
4581 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4582 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4583 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4584 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4585 example:
4586 @smallexample
4587 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4588 @end smallexample
4589 @noindent
4590 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4591 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4592 placed inside the section list, for example:
4593 @smallexample
4594 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4595 @end smallexample
4596 @noindent
4597 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4598 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4599 more than one section, as described below.
4600
4601 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4602 @smallexample
4603 *(.text .rdata)
4604 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4605 @end smallexample
4606 @noindent
4607 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4608 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4609 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4610 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4611 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4612 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4613
4614 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4615 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4616 immediately following section, for example:
4617 @smallexample
4618 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4619 @end smallexample
4620 @noindent
4621 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4622 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4623 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4624 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4625 could be modified to:
4626 @smallexample
4627 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4628 @end smallexample
4629 @noindent
4630 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4631 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4632 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4633 @smallexample
4634 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4635 @end smallexample
4636
4637 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4638 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4639 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4640 @smallexample
4641 data.o(.data)
4642 @end smallexample
4643
4644 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4645 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4646
4647 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4648
4649 @smallexample
4650 @group
4651 SECTIONS @{
4652 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4653 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4654 @}
4655 @end group
4656 @end smallexample
4657
4658 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4659 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4660 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4661 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4662 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4663
4664 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4665 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4666 with no whitespace around the colon.
4667
4668 @table @samp
4669 @item archive:file
4670 matches file within archive
4671 @item archive:
4672 matches the whole archive
4673 @item :file
4674 matches file but not one in an archive
4675 @end table
4676
4677 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4678 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4679 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4680 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4681 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4682 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4683 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4684 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4685 command.
4686
4687 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4688 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4689 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4690 @smallexample
4691 data.o
4692 @end smallexample
4693
4694 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4695 and does not contain any wild card
4696 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4697 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4698 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4699 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4700 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4701 the archive search path.
4702
4703 @node Input Section Wildcards
4704 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4705 @cindex input section wildcards
4706 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4707 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4708 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4709 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4710 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4711
4712 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4713 pattern for the file name.
4714
4715 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4716
4717 @table @samp
4718 @item *
4719 matches any number of characters
4720 @item ?
4721 matches any single character
4722 @item [@var{chars}]
4723 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4724 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4725 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4726 @item \
4727 quotes the following character
4728 @end table
4729
4730 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4731 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4732 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4733 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4734 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4735 a @samp{/} character.
4736
4737 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4738 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4739 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4740
4741 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4742 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4743 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4744 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4745 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4746 @smallexample
4747 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4748 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4749 @end smallexample
4750
4751 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4752 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4753 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4754 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4755 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4756 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4757 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4758
4759 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4760 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4761 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4762 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4763 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4764 needed.
4765
4766 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4767 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4768 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4769 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4770 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4771 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4772 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4773 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4774
4775 @cindex SORT
4776 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4777
4778 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4779 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4780
4781 @enumerate
4782 @item
4783 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4784 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4785 sections have the same name.
4786 @item
4787 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4788 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4789 sections have the same alignment.
4790 @item
4791 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4792 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4793 @item
4794 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4795 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4796 @item
4797 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4798 @end enumerate
4799
4800 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4801 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4802 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4803
4804 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4805 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4806 treated as nested sorting command.
4807
4808 @enumerate
4809 @item
4810 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4811 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4812 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4813 @item
4814 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4815 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4816 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4817 @end enumerate
4818
4819 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4820 command-line option will be ignored.
4821
4822 @cindex SORT_NONE
4823 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4824 section sorting option.
4825
4826 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4827 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4828 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4829
4830 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4831 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4832 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4833 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4834 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4835 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4836 @smallexample
4837 @group
4838 SECTIONS @{
4839 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4840 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4841 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4842 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4843 @}
4844 @end group
4845 @end smallexample
4846
4847 @node Input Section Common
4848 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4849 @cindex common symbol placement
4850 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4851 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4852 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4853 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4854 named @samp{COMMON}.
4855
4856 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4857 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4858 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4859 input files are placed in another section.
4860
4861 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4862 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4863 @smallexample
4864 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4865 @end smallexample
4866
4867 @cindex scommon section
4868 @cindex small common symbols
4869 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4870 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4871 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4872 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4873 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4874 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4875 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4876 locations.
4877
4878 @cindex [COMMON]
4879 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4880 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4881 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4882
4883 @node Input Section Keep
4884 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4885 @cindex KEEP
4886 @cindex garbage collection
4887 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4888 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4889 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4890 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4891 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4892
4893 @node Input Section Example
4894 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4895 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4896 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4897 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4898 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4899 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4900 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4901 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4902 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4903 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4904
4905 @smallexample
4906 @group
4907 SECTIONS @{
4908 outputa 0x10000 :
4909 @{
4910 all.o
4911 foo.o (.input1)
4912 @}
4913 @end group
4914 @group
4915 outputb :
4916 @{
4917 foo.o (.input2)
4918 foo1.o (.input1)
4919 @}
4920 @end group
4921 @group
4922 outputc :
4923 @{
4924 *(.input1)
4925 *(.input2)
4926 @}
4927 @}
4928 @end group
4929 @end smallexample
4930
4931 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4932 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4933 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4934 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4935 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4936 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4937 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4938
4939 @node Output Section Data
4940 @subsection Output Section Data
4941 @cindex data
4942 @cindex section data
4943 @cindex output section data
4944 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4945 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4946 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4947 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4948 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4949 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4950 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4951 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4952 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4953 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4954 counter.
4955
4956 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4957 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4958 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4959 stored.
4960
4961 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4962 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4963 @smallexample
4964 BYTE(1)
4965 LONG(addr)
4966 @end smallexample
4967
4968 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4969 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4970 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4971 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4972 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4973
4974 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4975 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4976 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4977 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4978 endianness of the first input object file.
4979
4980 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4981 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4982 @smallexample
4983 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4984 @end smallexample
4985 whereas this will work:
4986 @smallexample
4987 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4988 @end smallexample
4989
4990 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4991 @cindex holes, filling
4992 @cindex unspecified memory
4993 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4994 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4995 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4996 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4997 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4998 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4999 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
5000 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
5001 different parts of an output section.
5002
5003 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
5004 value @samp{0x90}:
5005 @smallexample
5006 FILL(0x90909090)
5007 @end smallexample
5008
5009 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
5010 section attribute, but it only affects the
5011 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5012 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
5013 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
5014 expression.
5015
5016 @node Output Section Keywords
5017 @subsection Output Section Keywords
5018 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5019 commands.
5020
5021 @table @code
5022 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5023 @cindex input filename symbols
5024 @cindex filename symbols
5025 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5026 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5027 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5028 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5029 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5030
5031 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5032 normally used for any other object file format.
5033
5034 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5035 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5036 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
5037 @item CONSTRUCTORS
5038 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5039 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5040 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5041 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5042 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5043 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5044 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5045 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5046 ignored for other object file formats.
5047
5048 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
5049 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5050 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5051 the start and end of the global destructors. The
5052 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5053 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5054 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5055 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5056 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5057 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5058 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5059 @code{exit}.
5060
5061 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5062 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5063 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5064 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5065 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5066 runtime code expects to see.
5067
5068 @smallexample
5069 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5070 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5071 *(.ctors)
5072 LONG(0)
5073 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5074 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5075 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5076 *(.dtors)
5077 LONG(0)
5078 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5079 @end smallexample
5080
5081 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5082 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5083 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5084 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
5085 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5086 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5087 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
5088 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
5089
5090 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5091 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5092 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5093 scripts.
5094
5095 @end table
5096
5097 @node Output Section Discarding
5098 @subsection Output Section Discarding
5099 @cindex discarding sections
5100 @cindex sections, discarding
5101 @cindex removing sections
5102 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5103 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5104 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
5105 @smallexample
5106 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
5107 @end smallexample
5108 @noindent
5109 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
5110 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5111 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
5112 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5113 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5114 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5115 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5116 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5117 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
5118
5119 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
5120 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5121 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
5122 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5123 section is discarded.
5124
5125 @cindex /DISCARD/
5126 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5127 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5128 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5129
5130 Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5131 discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5132 members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5133 Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5134
5135 @node Output Section Attributes
5136 @subsection Output Section Attributes
5137 @cindex output section attributes
5138 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5139 like this:
5140
5141 @smallexample
5142 @group
5143 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5144 [AT(@var{lma})]
5145 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5146 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5147 [@var{constraint}]
5148 @{
5149 @var{output-section-command}
5150 @var{output-section-command}
5151 @dots{}
5152 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5153 @end group
5154 @end smallexample
5155
5156 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5157 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5158 remaining section attributes.
5159
5160 @menu
5161 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5162 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5163 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5164 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5165 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5166 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5167 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5168 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5169 @end menu
5170
5171 @node Output Section Type
5172 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5173 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5174 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5175
5176 @table @code
5177 @item NOLOAD
5178 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5179 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5180 @item DSECT
5181 @itemx COPY
5182 @itemx INFO
5183 @itemx OVERLAY
5184 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5185 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5186 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5187 section when the program is run.
5188 @end table
5189
5190 @kindex NOLOAD
5191 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5192 @cindex loading, preventing
5193 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5194 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5195 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5196 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5197 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5198 @smallexample
5199 @group
5200 SECTIONS @{
5201 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5202 @dots{}
5203 @}
5204 @end group
5205 @end smallexample
5206
5207 @node Output Section LMA
5208 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5209 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5210 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5211 @cindex load address
5212 @cindex section load address
5213 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5214 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5215 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5216 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5217 address is optional.
5218
5219 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5220 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5221 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5222 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5223 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5224
5225 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5226 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5227 load address:
5228
5229 @itemize @bullet
5230 @item
5231 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5232 the LMA address as well.
5233
5234 @item
5235 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5236
5237 @item
5238 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5239 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5240 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5241 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5242 the last section in the located region.
5243
5244 @item
5245 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5246 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5247
5248 @item
5249 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5250 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5251 @end itemize
5252
5253 @cindex ROM initialized data
5254 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5255 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5256 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5257 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5258 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5259 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5260 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5261 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5262 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5263
5264 @smallexample
5265 @group
5266 SECTIONS
5267 @{
5268 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5269 .mdata 0x2000 :
5270 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5271 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5272 .bss 0x3000 :
5273 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5274 @}
5275 @end group
5276 @end smallexample
5277
5278 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5279 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5280 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5281 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5282 script.
5283
5284 @smallexample
5285 @group
5286 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5287 char *src = &_etext;
5288 char *dst = &_data;
5289
5290 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5291 while (dst < &_edata)
5292 *dst++ = *src++;
5293
5294 /* Zero bss. */
5295 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5296 *dst = 0;
5297 @end group
5298 @end smallexample
5299
5300 @node Forced Output Alignment
5301 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5302 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5303 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5304 @cindex output section alignment
5305 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5306 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5307 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5308
5309 @node Forced Input Alignment
5310 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5311 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5312 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5313 @cindex input section alignment
5314 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5315 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5316 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5317
5318 @node Output Section Constraint
5319 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5320 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5321 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5322 @cindex constraints on output sections
5323 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5324 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5325 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5326 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5327
5328 @node Output Section Region
5329 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5330 @kindex >@var{region}
5331 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5332 @cindex memory regions and sections
5333 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5334 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5335
5336 Here is a simple example:
5337 @smallexample
5338 @group
5339 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5340 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5341 @end group
5342 @end smallexample
5343
5344 @node Output Section Phdr
5345 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5346 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5347 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5348 @cindex program headers and sections
5349 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5350 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5351 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5352 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5353 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5354 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5355
5356 Here is a simple example:
5357 @smallexample
5358 @group
5359 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5360 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5361 @end group
5362 @end smallexample
5363
5364 @node Output Section Fill
5365 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5366 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5367 @cindex section fill pattern
5368 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5369 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5370 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5371 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5372 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5373 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5374 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5375 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5376 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5377 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5378 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5379 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5380 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5381
5382 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5383 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5384
5385 Here is a simple example:
5386 @smallexample
5387 @group
5388 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5389 @end group
5390 @end smallexample
5391
5392 @node Overlay Description
5393 @subsection Overlay Description
5394 @kindex OVERLAY
5395 @cindex overlays
5396 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5397 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5398 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5399 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5400 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5401 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5402 than another.
5403
5404 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5405 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5406 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5407 command is as follows:
5408 @smallexample
5409 @group
5410 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5411 @{
5412 @var{secname1}
5413 @{
5414 @var{output-section-command}
5415 @var{output-section-command}
5416 @dots{}
5417 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5418 @var{secname2}
5419 @{
5420 @var{output-section-command}
5421 @var{output-section-command}
5422 @dots{}
5423 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5424 @dots{}
5425 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5426 @end group
5427 @end smallexample
5428
5429 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5430 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5431 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5432 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5433 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5434 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5435
5436 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5437 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5438
5439 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5440 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5441 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5442 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5443 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5444 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5445
5446 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5447 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5448 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5449 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5450 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5451
5452 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5453 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5454 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5455 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5456 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5457 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5458 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5459
5460 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5461 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5462
5463 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5464 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5465 @smallexample
5466 @group
5467 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5468 @{
5469 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5470 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5471 @}
5472 @end group
5473 @end smallexample
5474 @noindent
5475 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5476 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5477 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5478 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5479 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5480 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5481
5482 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5483 like the following.
5484
5485 @smallexample
5486 @group
5487 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5488 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5489 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5490 @end group
5491 @end smallexample
5492
5493 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5494 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5495 example could have been written identically as follows.
5496
5497 @smallexample
5498 @group
5499 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5500 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5501 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5502 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5503 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5504 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5505 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5506 @end group
5507 @end smallexample
5508
5509 @node MEMORY
5510 @section MEMORY Command
5511 @kindex MEMORY
5512 @cindex memory regions
5513 @cindex regions of memory
5514 @cindex allocating memory
5515 @cindex discontinuous memory
5516 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5517 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5518
5519 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5520 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5521 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5522 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5523 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5524 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5525 around to fit into the available regions.
5526
5527 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5528 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5529 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5530 @code{MEMORY} is:
5531 @smallexample
5532 @group
5533 MEMORY
5534 @{
5535 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5536 @dots{}
5537 @}
5538 @end group
5539 @end smallexample
5540
5541 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5542 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5543 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5544 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5545 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5546 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5547 command.
5548
5549 @cindex memory region attributes
5550 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5551 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5552 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5553 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5554 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5555 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5556 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5557
5558 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5559 @table @samp
5560 @item R
5561 Read-only section
5562 @item W
5563 Read/write section
5564 @item X
5565 Executable section
5566 @item A
5567 Allocatable section
5568 @item I
5569 Initialized section
5570 @item L
5571 Same as @samp{I}
5572 @item !
5573 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5574 @end table
5575
5576 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5577 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5578 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5579 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5580 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5581 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5582 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5583 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5584
5585 @kindex ORIGIN =
5586 @kindex o =
5587 @kindex org =
5588 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5589 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5590 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5591 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5592 @code{ORG}).
5593
5594 @kindex LENGTH =
5595 @kindex len =
5596 @kindex l =
5597 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5598 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5599 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5600 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5601
5602 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5603 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5604 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5605 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5606 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5607 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5608 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5609 region.
5610
5611 @smallexample
5612 @group
5613 MEMORY
5614 @{
5615 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5616 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5617 @}
5618 @end group
5619 @end smallexample
5620
5621 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5622 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5623 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5624 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5625 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5626 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5627 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5628 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5629 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5630
5631 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5632 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5633 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5634
5635 @smallexample
5636 @group
5637 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5638 @end group
5639 @end smallexample
5640
5641 @node PHDRS
5642 @section PHDRS Command
5643 @kindex PHDRS
5644 @cindex program headers
5645 @cindex ELF program headers
5646 @cindex program segments
5647 @cindex segments, ELF
5648 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5649 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5650 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5651 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5652
5653 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5654 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5655 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5656 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5657 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5658
5659 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5660 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5661 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5662 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5663 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5664
5665 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5666 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5667 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5668
5669 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5670 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5671
5672 @smallexample
5673 @group
5674 PHDRS
5675 @{
5676 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5677 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5678 @}
5679 @end group
5680 @end smallexample
5681
5682 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5683 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5684 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5685 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5686 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5687 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5688
5689 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5690 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5691 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5692 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5693 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5694 Section Phdr}.
5695
5696 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5697 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5698 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5699 contain the section.
5700
5701 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5702 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5703 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5704 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5705 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5706 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5707 segment at all.
5708
5709 @kindex FILEHDR
5710 @kindex PHDRS
5711 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5712 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5713 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5714 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5715 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5716 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5717 these keywords.
5718
5719 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5720 value of the keyword.
5721
5722 @table @asis
5723 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5724 Indicates an unused program header.
5725
5726 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5727 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5728 the file.
5729
5730 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5731 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5732
5733 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5734 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5735 found.
5736
5737 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5738 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5739
5740 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5741 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5742 ABI.
5743
5744 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5745 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5746
5747 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5748 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5749
5750 @item @var{expression}
5751 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5752 be used for types not defined above.
5753 @end table
5754
5755 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5756 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5757 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5758 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5759 output section attribute.
5760
5761 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5762 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5763 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5764 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5765 header.
5766
5767 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5768 headers used on a native ELF system.
5769
5770 @example
5771 @group
5772 PHDRS
5773 @{
5774 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5775 interp PT_INTERP ;
5776 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5777 data PT_LOAD ;
5778 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5779 @}
5780
5781 SECTIONS
5782 @{
5783 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5784 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5785 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5786 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5787 @dots{}
5788 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5789 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5790 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5791 @dots{}
5792 @}
5793 @end group
5794 @end example
5795
5796 @node VERSION
5797 @section VERSION Command
5798 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5799 @cindex symbol versions
5800 @cindex version script
5801 @cindex versions of symbols
5802 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5803 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5804 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5805 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5806 shared library.
5807
5808 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5809 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5810 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5811
5812 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5813 @smallexample
5814 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5815 @end smallexample
5816
5817 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5818 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5819 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5820 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5821 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5822 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5823 library.
5824
5825 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5826 examples.
5827
5828 @smallexample
5829 VERS_1.1 @{
5830 global:
5831 foo1;
5832 local:
5833 old*;
5834 original*;
5835 new*;
5836 @};
5837
5838 VERS_1.2 @{
5839 foo2;
5840 @} VERS_1.1;
5841
5842 VERS_2.0 @{
5843 bar1; bar2;
5844 extern "C++" @{
5845 ns::*;
5846 "f(int, double)";
5847 @};
5848 @} VERS_1.2;
5849 @end smallexample
5850
5851 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5852 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5853 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5854 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5855 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5856 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5857 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5858 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5859 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5860 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5861
5862 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5863 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5864 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5865
5866 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5867 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5868 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5869
5870 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5871 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5872 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5873 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5874 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5875 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5876 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5877 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5878 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5879
5880 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5881 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5882 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5883 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5884
5885 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5886 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5887 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5888 won't.
5889
5890 @smallexample
5891 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5892 @end smallexample
5893
5894 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5895 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5896 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5897 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5898 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5899 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5900 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5901 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5902 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5903 search for each symbol reference.
5904
5905 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5906 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5907 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5908 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5909 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5910 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5911 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5912 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5913 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5914
5915 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5916 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5917 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5918 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5919 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5920 @smallexample
5921 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5922 @end smallexample
5923 @noindent
5924 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5925 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5926 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5927 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5928 takes precedence over a version script.
5929
5930 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5931 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5932 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5933 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5934 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5935
5936 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5937 source file. Here is an example:
5938
5939 @smallexample
5940 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5941 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5942 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5943 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5944 @end smallexample
5945
5946 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5947 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5948 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5949 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5950
5951 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5952 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5953 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5954 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5955 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5956 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5957
5958 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5959 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5960 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5961 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5962
5963 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5964
5965 @smallexample
5966 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5967 @end smallexample
5968
5969 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5970 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5971 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5972 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5973 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5974
5975 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5976 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5977 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5978 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5979 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5980 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5981 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5982 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5983 expect when you upgrade.
5984
5985 @node Expressions
5986 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5987 @cindex expressions
5988 @cindex arithmetic
5989 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5990 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5991 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5992 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5993
5994 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5995
5996 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5997 expressions.
5998
5999 @menu
6000 * Constants:: Constants
6001 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
6002 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
6003 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
6004 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6005 * Operators:: Operators
6006 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
6007 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6008 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6009 @end menu
6010
6011 @node Constants
6012 @subsection Constants
6013 @cindex integer notation
6014 @cindex constants in linker scripts
6015 All constants are integers.
6016
6017 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6018 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
6019 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
6020 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
6021 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6022 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
6023
6024 @cindex scaled integers
6025 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
6026 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
6027 @cindex suffixes for integers
6028 @cindex integer suffixes
6029 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6030 constant by
6031 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6032 @ifnottex
6033 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6034 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6035 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6036 @end ifnottex
6037 @tex
6038 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6039 @end tex
6040 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6041 respectively. For example, the following
6042 all refer to the same quantity:
6043
6044 @smallexample
6045 _fourk_1 = 4K;
6046 _fourk_2 = 4096;
6047 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
6048 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
6049 @end smallexample
6050
6051 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6052 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6053
6054 @node Symbolic Constants
6055 @subsection Symbolic Constants
6056 @cindex symbolic constants
6057 @kindex CONSTANT
6058 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
6059 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6060
6061 @table @code
6062 @item MAXPAGESIZE
6063 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6064 The target's maximum page size.
6065
6066 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
6067 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6068 The target's default page size.
6069 @end table
6070
6071 So for example:
6072
6073 @smallexample
6074 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
6075 @end smallexample
6076
6077 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6078 supported by the target.
6079
6080 @node Symbols
6081 @subsection Symbol Names
6082 @cindex symbol names
6083 @cindex names
6084 @cindex quoted symbol names
6085 @kindex "
6086 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6087 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6088 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6089 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6090 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6091 @smallexample
6092 "SECTION" = 9;
6093 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
6094 @end smallexample
6095
6096 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6097 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6098 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6099
6100 @node Orphan Sections
6101 @subsection Orphan Sections
6102 @cindex orphan
6103 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6104 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6105 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
6106 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6107 in which to place the orphaned input section.
6108
6109 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6110 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6111 placed at the end of that output section.
6112
6113 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6114 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6115 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6116 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6117 one new output section.
6118
6119 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6120 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
6121 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6122 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6123 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6124 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6125 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
6126
6127 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6128 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
6129 output sections an orphan is placed in.
6130
6131 @node Location Counter
6132 @subsection The Location Counter
6133 @kindex .
6134 @cindex dot
6135 @cindex location counter
6136 @cindex current output location
6137 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6138 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6139 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6140 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6141 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6142
6143 @cindex holes
6144 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6145 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6146 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6147 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6148 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6149
6150 @smallexample
6151 SECTIONS
6152 @{
6153 output :
6154 @{
6155 file1(.text)
6156 . = . + 1000;
6157 file2(.text)
6158 . += 1000;
6159 file3(.text)
6160 @} = 0x12345678;
6161 @}
6162 @end smallexample
6163 @noindent
6164 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6165 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6166 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6167 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6168 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6169 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6170
6171 @cindex dot inside sections
6172 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6173 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6174 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6175 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6176 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6177 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6178
6179 @smallexample
6180 SECTIONS
6181 @{
6182 . = 0x100
6183 .text: @{
6184 *(.text)
6185 . = 0x200
6186 @}
6187 . = 0x500
6188 .data: @{
6189 *(.data)
6190 . += 0x600
6191 @}
6192 @}
6193 @end smallexample
6194
6195 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6196 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6197 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6198 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6199 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6200 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6201 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6202 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6203
6204 @cindex dot outside sections
6205 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6206 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6207 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6208
6209 @smallexample
6210 SECTIONS
6211 @{
6212 start_of_text = . ;
6213 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6214 end_of_text = . ;
6215
6216 start_of_data = . ;
6217 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6218 end_of_data = . ;
6219 @}
6220 @end smallexample
6221
6222 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6223 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6224 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6225 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6226 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6227 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6228 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6229 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6230 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6231 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6232 as follows:
6233
6234 @smallexample
6235 SECTIONS
6236 @{
6237 start_of_text = . ;
6238 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6239 end_of_text = . ;
6240
6241 start_of_data = . ;
6242 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6243 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6244 end_of_data = . ;
6245 @}
6246 @end smallexample
6247
6248 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6249 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6250 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6251 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6252 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6253 section. So you could write:
6254
6255 @smallexample
6256 SECTIONS
6257 @{
6258 start_of_text = . ;
6259 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6260 end_of_text = . ;
6261
6262 . = . ;
6263 start_of_data = . ;
6264 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6265 end_of_data = . ;
6266 @}
6267 @end smallexample
6268
6269 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6270 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6271
6272 @need 2000
6273 @node Operators
6274 @subsection Operators
6275 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6276 @cindex arithmetic operators
6277 @cindex precedence in expressions
6278 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6279 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6280 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6281 @ifnottex
6282 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6283 @smallexample
6284 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6285 (highest)
6286 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6287 2 left * / %
6288 3 left + -
6289 4 left >> <<
6290 5 left == != > < <= >=
6291 6 left &
6292 7 left |
6293 8 left &&
6294 9 left ||
6295 10 right ? :
6296 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6297 (lowest)
6298 @end smallexample
6299 Notes:
6300 (1) Prefix operators
6301 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6302 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6303 @end ifnottex
6304 @tex
6305 \vskip \baselineskip
6306 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6307 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6308 \hrule
6309 \halign
6310 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6311 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6312 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6313 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6314 \noalign{\hrule}
6315 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6316 &highest&&&&&\cr
6317 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6318 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6319 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6320 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6321 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6322 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6323 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6324 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6325 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6326 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6327 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6328 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6329 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6330 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6331 \hrule}
6332 @end tex
6333 @iftex
6334 {
6335 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6336 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6337 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6338 }
6339 @end iftex
6340 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6341
6342 @node Evaluation
6343 @subsection Evaluation
6344 @cindex lazy evaluation
6345 @cindex expression evaluation order
6346 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6347 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6348
6349 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6350 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6351 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6352 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6353
6354 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6355 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6356 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6357 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6358
6359 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6360 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6361 allocation.
6362
6363 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6364 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6365
6366 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6367 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6368 following
6369 @smallexample
6370 @group
6371 SECTIONS
6372 @{
6373 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6374 @{ *(.text) @}
6375 @}
6376 @end group
6377 @end smallexample
6378 @noindent
6379 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6380 address}.
6381
6382 @node Expression Section
6383 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6384 @cindex expression sections
6385 @cindex absolute expressions
6386 @cindex relative expressions
6387 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6388 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6389 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6390 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6391 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6392 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6393 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6394 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6395 operations.
6396
6397 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6398 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6399 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6400 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6401 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6402 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6403 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6404 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6405 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6406 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6407 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6408 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6409 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6410 everywhere.
6411
6412 In the following simple example,
6413
6414 @smallexample
6415 @group
6416 SECTIONS
6417 @{
6418 . = 0x100;
6419 __executable_start = 0x100;
6420 .data :
6421 @{
6422 . = 0x10;
6423 __data_start = 0x10;
6424 *(.data)
6425 @}
6426 @dots{}
6427 @}
6428 @end group
6429 @end smallexample
6430
6431 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6432 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6433 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6434 section in the second two assignments.
6435
6436 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6437 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6438
6439 @itemize @bullet
6440 @item
6441 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6442 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6443 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6444 @item
6445 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6446 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6447 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6448 @item
6449 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6450 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6451 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6452 before applying the operator.
6453 @end itemize
6454
6455 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6456
6457 @itemize @bullet
6458 @item
6459 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6460 @item
6461 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6462 @item
6463 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6464 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6465 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6466 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6467 but an absolute address otherwise.
6468 @item
6469 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6470 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6471 section as the relative operand(s).
6472 @item
6473 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6474 conversions) is an absolute address.
6475 @end itemize
6476
6477 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6478 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6479 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6480 section @samp{.data}:
6481 @smallexample
6482 SECTIONS
6483 @{
6484 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6485 @}
6486 @end smallexample
6487 @noindent
6488 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6489 @samp{.data} section.
6490
6491 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6492 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6493
6494 @node Builtin Functions
6495 @subsection Builtin Functions
6496 @cindex functions in expressions
6497 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6498 use in linker script expressions.
6499
6500 @table @code
6501 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6502 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6503 @cindex expression, absolute
6504 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6505 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6506 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6507 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6508
6509 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6510 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6511 @cindex section address in expression
6512 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6513 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6514 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6515 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6516 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6517 the other two will be absolute:
6518 @smallexample
6519 @group
6520 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6521 .output1 :
6522 @{
6523 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6524 @dots{}
6525 @}
6526 .output :
6527 @{
6528 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6529 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6530 @}
6531 @dots{} @}
6532 @end group
6533 @end smallexample
6534
6535 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6536 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6537 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6538 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6539 @cindex round up location counter
6540 @cindex align location counter
6541 @cindex round up expression
6542 @cindex align expression
6543 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6544 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6545 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6546 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6547 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6548 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6549
6550 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6551 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6552 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6553 input sections:
6554 @smallexample
6555 @group
6556 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6557 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6558 *(.data)
6559 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6560 @}
6561 @dots{} @}
6562 @end group
6563 @end smallexample
6564 @noindent
6565 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6566 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6567 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6568 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6569
6570 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6571
6572 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6573 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6574 @cindex section alignment
6575 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6576 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6577 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6578 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6579 value in that section.
6580 @smallexample
6581 @group
6582 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6583 .output @{
6584 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6585 @dots{}
6586 @}
6587 @dots{} @}
6588 @end group
6589 @end smallexample
6590
6591 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6592 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6593 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6594 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6595 section.
6596
6597 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6598 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6599 This is equivalent to either
6600 @smallexample
6601 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6602 @end smallexample
6603 or
6604 @smallexample
6605 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6606 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6607 @end smallexample
6608 @noindent
6609 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6610 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6611 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6612 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6613 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6614 bytes in the on-disk file.
6615
6616 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6617 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6618 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6619 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6620 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6621 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6622 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6623
6624 @noindent
6625 Example:
6626 @smallexample
6627 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6628 @end smallexample
6629
6630 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6631 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6632 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6633 evaluation purposes.
6634
6635 @smallexample
6636 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6637 @end smallexample
6638
6639 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6640 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6641 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6642 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6643 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6644 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6645 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6646 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6647 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6648 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6649 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6650 section alignment.
6651
6652 @smallexample
6653 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6654 @end smallexample
6655
6656 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6657 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6658 @cindex symbol defaults
6659 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6660 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6661 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6662 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6663 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6664 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6665 existed, its value is preserved:
6666
6667 @smallexample
6668 @group
6669 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6670 .text : @{
6671 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6672 @dots{}
6673 @}
6674 @dots{}
6675 @}
6676 @end group
6677 @end smallexample
6678
6679 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6680 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6681 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6682
6683 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6684 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6685 @cindex section load address in expression
6686 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6687 Section LMA}).
6688
6689 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6690 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6691 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6692 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6693
6694 @kindex MAX
6695 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6696 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6697
6698 @kindex MIN
6699 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6700 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6701
6702 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6703 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6704 @cindex unallocated address, next
6705 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6706 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6707 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6708 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6709
6710 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6711 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6712 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6713
6714 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6715 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6716 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6717 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6718 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6719 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6720 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6721 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6722 name.
6723
6724 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6725 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6726 @cindex section size
6727 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6728 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6729 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6730 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6731 @smallexample
6732 @group
6733 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6734 .output @{
6735 .start = . ;
6736 @dots{}
6737 .end = . ;
6738 @}
6739 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6740 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6741 @dots{} @}
6742 @end group
6743 @end smallexample
6744
6745 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6746 @itemx sizeof_headers
6747 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6748 @cindex header size
6749 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6750 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6751 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6752 choose, to facilitate paging.
6753
6754 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6755 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6756 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6757 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6758 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6759 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6760 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6761 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6762 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6763 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6764 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6765 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6766 @end table
6767
6768 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6769 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6770 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6771 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6772 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6773 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6774 linker will report an error.
6775
6776 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6777
6778 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6779 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6780 commands.
6781
6782 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6783 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6784 read. This can affect archive searching.
6785
6786 @ifset GENERIC
6787 @node Machine Dependent
6788 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6789
6790 @cindex machine dependencies
6791 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6792 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6793 functionality are not listed.
6794
6795 @menu
6796 @ifset H8300
6797 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6798 @end ifset
6799 @ifset M68HC11
6800 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6801 @end ifset
6802 @ifset ARM
6803 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6804 @end ifset
6805 @ifset HPPA
6806 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6807 @end ifset
6808 @ifset M68K
6809 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6810 @end ifset
6811 @ifset MIPS
6812 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6813 @end ifset
6814 @ifset MMIX
6815 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6816 @end ifset
6817 @ifset MSP430
6818 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6819 @end ifset
6820 @ifset NDS32
6821 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6822 @end ifset
6823 @ifset NIOSII
6824 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6825 @end ifset
6826 @ifset POWERPC
6827 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6828 @end ifset
6829 @ifset POWERPC64
6830 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6831 @end ifset
6832 @ifset S/390
6833 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6834 @end ifset
6835 @ifset SPU
6836 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6837 @end ifset
6838 @ifset TICOFF
6839 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6840 @end ifset
6841 @ifset WIN32
6842 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6843 @end ifset
6844 @ifset XTENSA
6845 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6846 @end ifset
6847 @end menu
6848 @end ifset
6849
6850 @ifset H8300
6851 @ifclear GENERIC
6852 @raisesections
6853 @end ifclear
6854
6855 @node H8/300
6856 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6857
6858 @cindex H8/300 support
6859 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6860 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6861
6862 @table @emph
6863 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6864 @item relaxing address modes
6865 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6866 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6867 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6868 respectively.
6869
6870 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6871 @item synthesizing instructions
6872 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6873 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6874 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6875 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6876 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6877 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6878 top page of memory).
6879
6880 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6881 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6882 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6883 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6884 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6885 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6886 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6887
6888 @item bit manipulation instructions
6889 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6890 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6891 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6892 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6893 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6894 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6895 the top page of memory).
6896
6897 @item system control instructions
6898 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6899 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6900 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6901 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6902 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6903 the top page of memory).
6904 @end table
6905
6906 @ifclear GENERIC
6907 @lowersections
6908 @end ifclear
6909 @end ifset
6910
6911 @ifclear GENERIC
6912 @ifset Renesas
6913 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6914 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6915 @node Renesas
6916 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6917
6918 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6919 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6920 options are required for these chips.
6921 @end ifset
6922 @end ifclear
6923
6924 @ifset ARM
6925 @ifclear GENERIC
6926 @raisesections
6927 @end ifclear
6928
6929 @ifset M68HC11
6930 @ifclear GENERIC
6931 @raisesections
6932 @end ifclear
6933
6934 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6935 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6936
6937 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6938
6939 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6940
6941 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6942 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6943
6944 @table @emph
6945 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6946 @item relaxing address modes
6947 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6948 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6949 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6950 respectively.
6951
6952 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6953 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6954 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6955
6956 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6957 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6958 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6959 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6960 @code{bset} instructions.
6961
6962 @end table
6963
6964 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6965
6966 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6967 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6968 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6969 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6970 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6971 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6972 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6973 point to the function trampoline.
6974
6975 @ifclear GENERIC
6976 @lowersections
6977 @end ifclear
6978 @end ifset
6979
6980 @node ARM
6981 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6982
6983 @cindex ARM interworking support
6984 @kindex --support-old-code
6985 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6986 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6987 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6988 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6989 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6990 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6991 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6992 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6993 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6994 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6995
6996 @cindex thumb entry point
6997 @cindex entry point, thumb
6998 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6999 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
7000 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
7001 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
7002 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
7003 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7004
7005 @cindex PE import table prefixing
7006 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7007 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7008 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
7009 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
7010 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7011
7012 @cindex BE8
7013 @kindex --be8
7014 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
7015 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7016 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7017 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7018 little-endian code.
7019
7020 @cindex TARGET1
7021 @kindex --target1-rel
7022 @kindex --target1-abs
7023 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7024 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7025 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7026 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7027
7028 @cindex TARGET2
7029 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
7030 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7031 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7032 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7033 @table @samp
7034 @item rel
7035 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7036 @item abs
7037 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
7038 @item got-rel
7039 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7040 @end table
7041
7042 @cindex FIX_V4BX
7043 @kindex --fix-v4bx
7044 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7045 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7046 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7047 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7048
7049 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7050 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7051 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7052
7053 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7054 relocations are ignored.
7055
7056 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7057 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7058 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7059 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7060
7061 @smallexample
7062 TST rM, #1
7063 MOVEQ PC, rM
7064 BX Rn
7065 @end smallexample
7066
7067 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7068 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
7069 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
7070
7071 @cindex USE_BLX
7072 @kindex --use-blx
7073 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7074 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7075 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7076 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7077 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7078
7079 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7080 specify it if you are using that target.
7081
7082 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7083 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7084 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7085 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7086 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7087 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7088 the support code can read the intended values.
7089
7090 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7091 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7092 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7093 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7094 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7095 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7096
7097 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7098 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7099 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7100 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7101 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7102 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7103
7104 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7105 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7106 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7107 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7108 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7109 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7110 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7111
7112 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7113 @kindex --fix-arm1176
7114 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
7115 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7116 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7117 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
7118 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7119
7120 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
7121 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
7122 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7123
7124 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7125 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7126
7127 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7128 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7129 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7130 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7131 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7132 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7133 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7134 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7135
7136 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7137 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7138
7139 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7140 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7141 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7142 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7143 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7144
7145 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7146 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7147 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7148 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7149 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7150 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7151
7152 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7153 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7154
7155 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7156 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7157 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7158 occurs.
7159
7160 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7161 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7162 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7163 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7164 occurs.
7165
7166 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7167 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7168 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7169 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7170 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7171 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7172 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7173 not be diagnosed.
7174
7175 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7176 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7177 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7178 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7179 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7180 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7181 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7182
7183 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7184 @kindex --pic-veneer
7185 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7186 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7187 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7188 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7189
7190 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7191 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7192 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7193 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7194 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7195 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7196 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7197 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7198 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7199 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7200 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7201 where they should be placed.
7202
7203 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7204 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7205 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7206 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7207 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7208 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7209 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7210 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7211 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7212 from the input sections.
7213
7214 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7215 @samp{N = +1}.
7216
7217 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7218 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7219 otherwise.
7220
7221 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7222 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7223 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7224 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7225
7226 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7227
7228 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7229 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7230 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7231 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7232
7233 Please contact ARM for further details.
7234
7235 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7236 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7237 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7238 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7239
7240 @kindex --long-plt
7241 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7242 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7243 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7244 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7245
7246 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7247 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7248 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7249 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7250
7251 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7252 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7253 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7254 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7255 veneers in memory.
7256
7257 @kindex --cmse-implib
7258 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7259 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7260 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7261 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7262 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7263
7264 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7265 @cindex Input import library
7266 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7267 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7268 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7269 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7270 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7271 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7272 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7273 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7274 specified.
7275
7276 @ifclear GENERIC
7277 @lowersections
7278 @end ifclear
7279 @end ifset
7280
7281 @ifset HPPA
7282 @ifclear GENERIC
7283 @raisesections
7284 @end ifclear
7285
7286 @node HPPA ELF32
7287 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7288 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7289 @kindex --multi-subspace
7290 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7291 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7292 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7293 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7294 multiple sub-spaces.
7295
7296 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7297 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7298 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7299 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7300 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7301 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7302 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7303 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7304 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7305 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7306 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7307 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7308 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7309 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7310 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7311 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7312
7313 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7314 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7315 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7316 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7317
7318 @ifclear GENERIC
7319 @lowersections
7320 @end ifclear
7321 @end ifset
7322
7323 @ifset M68K
7324 @ifclear GENERIC
7325 @raisesections
7326 @end ifclear
7327
7328 @node M68K
7329 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7330
7331 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7332 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7333 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7334 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7335 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7336 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7337 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7338 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7339 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7340 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7341 support such GOTs.
7342 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7343 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7344 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7345 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7346
7347 @ifclear GENERIC
7348 @lowersections
7349 @end ifclear
7350 @end ifset
7351
7352 @ifset MIPS
7353 @ifclear GENERIC
7354 @raisesections
7355 @end ifclear
7356
7357 @node MIPS
7358 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7359
7360 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7361 @kindex --insn32
7362 @kindex --no-insn32
7363 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7364 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7365 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7366 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7367 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7368 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7369
7370 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7371 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7372 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7373 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7374 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7375 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7376 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7377 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7378 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7379 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7380 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7381 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7382
7383 @ifclear GENERIC
7384 @lowersections
7385 @end ifclear
7386 @end ifset
7387
7388 @ifset MMIX
7389 @ifclear GENERIC
7390 @raisesections
7391 @end ifclear
7392
7393 @node MMIX
7394 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7395 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7396 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7397 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7398 can translate between the two formats.
7399
7400 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7401 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7402 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7403 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7404 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7405 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7406 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7407 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7408
7409 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7410 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7411 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7412 of a section.
7413
7414 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7415 are left out from an mmo file.
7416
7417 @ifclear GENERIC
7418 @lowersections
7419 @end ifclear
7420 @end ifset
7421
7422 @ifset MSP430
7423 @ifclear GENERIC
7424 @raisesections
7425 @end ifclear
7426
7427 @node MSP430
7428 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7429 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7430 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7431 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7432
7433 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7434 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7435
7436 @table @code
7437 @item @samp{.vectors}
7438 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7439
7440 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7441 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7442 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7443
7444 @item @samp{.infomem}
7445 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7446 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7447
7448 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7449 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7450 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7451
7452 @item @samp{.noinit}
7453 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7454
7455 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7456 @end table
7457
7458 @table @option
7459 @cindex MSP430 Options
7460 @kindex --code-region
7461 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7462 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7463 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7464 using this option.
7465
7466 @kindex --data-region
7467 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7468 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7469 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7470 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7471
7472 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7473 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7474 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7475 and @code{--data-region} options.
7476 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7477 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7478 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7479 @end table
7480
7481 @ifclear GENERIC
7482 @lowersections
7483 @end ifclear
7484 @end ifset
7485
7486 @ifset NDS32
7487 @ifclear GENERIC
7488 @raisesections
7489 @end ifclear
7490
7491 @node NDS32
7492 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7493 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7494 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7495 relaxes objects according to these options.
7496
7497 @table @code
7498 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7499 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7500
7501 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7502 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7503
7504 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7505 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7506
7507 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7508 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7509
7510 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7511 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7512
7513 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7514 Update the existing EX9 table.
7515
7516 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7517 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7518
7519 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7520 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7521
7522 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7523 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7524
7525 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7526 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7527 @end table
7528
7529 @ifclear GENERIC
7530 @lowersections
7531 @end ifclear
7532 @end ifset
7533
7534 @ifset NIOSII
7535 @ifclear GENERIC
7536 @raisesections
7537 @end ifclear
7538
7539 @node Nios II
7540 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7541 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7542 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7543
7544 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7545 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7546 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7547 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7548 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7549 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7550 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7551 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7552 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7553 larger than 256MB.
7554
7555 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7556 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7557 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7558 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7559 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7560 register as a temporary.
7561
7562 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7563 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7564 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7565
7566 @ifclear GENERIC
7567 @lowersections
7568 @end ifclear
7569 @end ifset
7570
7571 @ifset POWERPC
7572 @ifclear GENERIC
7573 @raisesections
7574 @end ifclear
7575
7576 @node PowerPC ELF32
7577 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7578 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7579 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7580 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7581 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7582 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7583 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7584 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7585 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7586 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7587 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7588 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7589 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7590
7591 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7592 @table @option
7593 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7594 @kindex --bss-plt
7595 @item --bss-plt
7596 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7597 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7598 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7599 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7600 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7601 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7602 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7603 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7604
7605 @kindex --secure-plt
7606 @item --secure-plt
7607 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7608 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7609 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7610 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7611 style BSS PLT.
7612
7613 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7614 @kindex --sdata-got
7615 @item --sdata-got
7616 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7617 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7618 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7619 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7620 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7621 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7622 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7623 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7624 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7625 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7626 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7627 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7628
7629 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7630 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7631 @item --emit-stub-syms
7632 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7633 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7634
7635 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7636 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7637 @item --no-tls-optimize
7638 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7639 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7640 disable the optimization.
7641 @end table
7642
7643 @ifclear GENERIC
7644 @lowersections
7645 @end ifclear
7646 @end ifset
7647
7648 @ifset POWERPC64
7649 @ifclear GENERIC
7650 @raisesections
7651 @end ifclear
7652
7653 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7654 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7655
7656 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7657 @table @option
7658 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7659 @kindex --stub-group-size
7660 @item --stub-group-size
7661 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7662 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7663 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7664 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7665 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7666 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7667 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7668 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7669 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7670 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7671 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7672 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7673 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7674 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7675
7676 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7677 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7678 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7679 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7680
7681 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7682 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7683 @item --emit-stub-syms
7684 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7685 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7686
7687 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7688 @kindex --dotsyms
7689 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7690 @item --dotsyms
7691 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7692 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7693 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7694 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7695 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7696 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7697 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7698 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7699 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7700 feature.
7701
7702 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7703 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7704 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7705 @item --save-restore-funcs
7706 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7707 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7708 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7709 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7710 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7711 link.
7712
7713 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7714 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7715 @item --no-tls-optimize
7716 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7717 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7718 disable the optimization.
7719
7720 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7721 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7722 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7723 @kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7724 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
7725 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7726 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7727 These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7728 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7729 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7730 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7731 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7732 generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7733 __tls_get_addr_opt.
7734 Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7735 much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7736 an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7737 will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7738 @option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7739 and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7740 this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7741 Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
7742 @option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
7743 register saves.
7744
7745 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7746 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7747 @item --no-opd-optimize
7748 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7749 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7750 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7751 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7752
7753 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7754 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7755 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7756 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7757 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7758 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7759 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7760
7761 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7762 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7763 @item --no-toc-optimize
7764 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7765 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7766 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7767 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7768 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7769 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7770 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7771 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7772 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7773 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7774 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7775 optimization.
7776
7777 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7778 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7779 @item --no-multi-toc
7780 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7781 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7782 where TOC
7783 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7784 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7785 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7786 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7787 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7788 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7789 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7790 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7791
7792 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7793 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7794 @item --no-toc-sort
7795 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7796 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7797 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7798 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7799 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7800 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7801 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7802 off this feature.
7803
7804 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7805 @kindex --plt-align
7806 @kindex --no-plt-align
7807 @item --plt-align
7808 @itemx --no-plt-align
7809 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7810 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7811 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7812 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7813 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7814 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7815 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7816
7817 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7818 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7819 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7820 @item --plt-static-chain
7821 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7822 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7823 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7824 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7825
7826 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7827 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7828 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7829 @item --plt-thread-safe
7830 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7831 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7832 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7833 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7834 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7835 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7836 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7837 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7838 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7839 default behaviour.
7840
7841 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7842 @kindex --plt-localentry
7843 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7844 @item --plt-localentry
7845 @itemx --no-localentry
7846 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7847 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7848 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7849 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7850 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7851 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7852 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7853 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7854 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7855 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7856 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7857 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7858 @end table
7859
7860 @ifclear GENERIC
7861 @lowersections
7862 @end ifclear
7863 @end ifset
7864
7865 @ifset S/390
7866 @ifclear GENERIC
7867 @raisesections
7868 @end ifclear
7869
7870 @node S/390 ELF
7871 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7872
7873 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7874 @table @option
7875
7876 @cindex S/390
7877 @kindex --s390-pgste
7878 @item --s390-pgste
7879 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7880 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7881 binaries marked that way.
7882 @end table
7883
7884 @ifclear GENERIC
7885 @lowersections
7886 @end ifclear
7887 @end ifset
7888
7889 @ifset SPU
7890 @ifclear GENERIC
7891 @raisesections
7892 @end ifclear
7893
7894 @node SPU ELF
7895 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7896
7897 @cindex SPU ELF options
7898 @table @option
7899
7900 @cindex SPU plugins
7901 @kindex --plugin
7902 @item --plugin
7903 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7904
7905 @cindex SPU overlays
7906 @kindex --no-overlays
7907 @item --no-overlays
7908 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7909 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7910 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7911 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7912
7913 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7914 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7915 @item --emit-stub-syms
7916 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7917 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7918
7919 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7920 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7921 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7922 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7923 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7924 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7925
7926 @cindex SPU local store size
7927 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7928 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7929 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7930 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7931 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7932
7933 @cindex SPU
7934 @kindex --stack-analysis
7935 @item --stack-analysis
7936 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7937 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7938 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7939 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7940 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7941 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7942 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7943 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7944 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7945 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7946 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7947 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7948 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7949 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7950 and calls will be given.
7951
7952 @cindex SPU
7953 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7954 @item --emit-stack-syms
7955 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7956 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7957 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7958 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7959 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7960 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7961 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7962 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7963 @end table
7964
7965 @ifclear GENERIC
7966 @lowersections
7967 @end ifclear
7968 @end ifset
7969
7970 @ifset TICOFF
7971 @ifclear GENERIC
7972 @raisesections
7973 @end ifclear
7974
7975 @node TI COFF
7976 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7977 @cindex TI COFF versions
7978 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7979 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7980 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7981 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7982 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7983 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7984
7985 @ifclear GENERIC
7986 @lowersections
7987 @end ifclear
7988 @end ifset
7989
7990 @ifset WIN32
7991 @ifclear GENERIC
7992 @raisesections
7993 @end ifclear
7994
7995 @node WIN32
7996 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7997
7998 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7999 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
8000 command-line options mentioned here.
8001
8002 @table @emph
8003 @cindex import libraries
8004 @item import libraries
8005 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
8006 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
8007 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8008 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
8009 support for creating such libraries provided with the
8010 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
8011
8012 @item exporting DLL symbols
8013 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
8014 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8015
8016 @table @emph
8017 @item using auto-export functionality
8018 @cindex using auto-export functionality
8019 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
8020 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
8021
8022 @itemize
8023 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8024 @item --exclude-symbols
8025 @item --exclude-libs
8026 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
8027 @item --version-script
8028 @end itemize
8029
8030 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8031 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8032 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8033 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8034 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
8035 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
8036 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8037 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8038
8039 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
8040 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8041 if either of the following are true:
8042
8043 @itemize
8044 @item A DEF file is used.
8045 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8046 @end itemize
8047
8048 @item using a DEF file
8049 @cindex using a DEF file
8050 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8051 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8052 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8053 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
8054 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
8055
8056 @example
8057 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8058 @end example
8059
8060 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8061 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8062
8063 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8064
8065 @example
8066 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
8067
8068 EXPORTS
8069 foo
8070 bar
8071 _bar = bar
8072 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8073 var1 DATA
8074 doo = foo == foo2
8075 eoo DATA == var1
8076 @end example
8077
8078 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
8079 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8080 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8081 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8082 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
8083 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8084 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8085 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8086 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
8087
8088 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8089 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8090 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8091
8092 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8093 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
8094 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
8095 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
8096
8097 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8098 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
8099 non-default base address for the image.
8100
8101 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
8102 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8103 filename specified on the command line.
8104
8105 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8106
8107 @example
8108 EXPORTS
8109 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8110 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
8111 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
8112 @end example
8113
8114 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8115 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8116 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8117 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8118 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
8119 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8120 string in import/export table for the symbol.
8121
8122 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8123
8124 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8125 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8126 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8127 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8128 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8129
8130 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8131 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8132 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8133 @code{*_imp__foo}).
8134
8135 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8136 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8137 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8138 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8139 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8140 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8141 application will behave unexpectedly.
8142
8143 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8144 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8145 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8146 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8147 the DLL without an import library.
8148
8149 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8150 other DEF file statements
8151
8152 @cindex creating a DEF file
8153 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8154 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8155
8156 @item Using decorations
8157 @cindex Using decorations
8158 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8159 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8160 declared as:
8161
8162 @example
8163 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8164 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8165 @end example
8166
8167 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8168 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8169 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8170 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8171
8172 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8173 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8174 instead:
8175
8176 @example
8177 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8178 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8179 @end example
8180
8181 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8182 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8183 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8184 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8185 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8186 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8187 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8188 information.
8189 @end table
8190
8191 @cindex automatic data imports
8192 @item automatic data imports
8193 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8194 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8195 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8196 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8197 code to these platforms, especially for large
8198 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8199 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8200 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8201 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8202 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8203 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8204 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8205 trigger the feature's use.
8206
8207 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8208 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8209
8210 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8211 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8212
8213 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8214 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8215 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8216 below.
8217
8218 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8219 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8220 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8221 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8222 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8223 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8224 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8225 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8226 references.
8227
8228 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8229 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8230 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8231 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8232 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8233 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8234 run without error on an older system.
8235
8236 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8237 enabled as needed.
8238
8239 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8240 @item direct linking to a dll
8241 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8242 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8243 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8244 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8245 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8246 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8247 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8248 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8249 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8250 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8251
8252 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8253 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8254 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8255 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8256 select the dll instead of an import library.
8257
8258
8259 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8260 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8261
8262 @example
8263 libxxx.dll.a
8264 xxx.dll.a
8265 libxxx.a
8266 xxx.lib
8267 libxxx.lib
8268 cygxxx.dll (*)
8269 libxxx.dll
8270 xxx.dll
8271 @end example
8272
8273 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8274
8275 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8276 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8277 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8278 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8279 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8280
8281 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8282 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8283 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8284 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8285 could coexist on the same machine.
8286
8287 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8288 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8289 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8290
8291 @example
8292 bin/
8293 cygxxx.dll
8294 lib/
8295 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8296 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8297 @end example
8298
8299 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8300 done two ways:
8301
8302 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8303 @example
8304 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8305 @end example
8306
8307 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8308 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8309 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8310 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8311
8312 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8313 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8314 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8315 making the app/dll.
8316
8317 @example
8318 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8319 @end example
8320
8321 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8322
8323 @example
8324 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8325 @end example
8326
8327 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8328 perfectly legal
8329
8330 @example
8331 bin/
8332 cygxxx-5.dll
8333 lib/
8334 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8335 @end example
8336
8337 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8338 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8339 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8340
8341 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8342 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8343
8344 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8345 work with auto-imported data.
8346
8347 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8348 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8349 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8350 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8351 possible to do this without an import lib.
8352
8353 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8354 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8355 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8356 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8357
8358 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8359 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8360 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8361 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8362 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8363 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8364 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8365
8366 @item symbol aliasing
8367 @table @emph
8368 @item adding additional names
8369 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8370 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8371 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8372 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8373 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8374
8375 @example
8376 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8377
8378 EXPORTS
8379 foo
8380 _foo = foo
8381 @end example
8382
8383 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8384
8385 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8386 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8387
8388 @example
8389 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8390 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8391 @end example
8392
8393 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8394 symbols.
8395
8396 @item renaming symbols
8397 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8398 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8399 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8400 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8401 created). In the following example:
8402
8403 @example
8404 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8405
8406 EXPORTS
8407 _foo = foo
8408 @end example
8409
8410 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8411 @samp{_foo}.
8412 @end table
8413
8414 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8415 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8416 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8417 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8418 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8419 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8420 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8421 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8422 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8423 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8424 which is probably not what you wanted.
8425
8426 @cindex weak externals
8427 @item weak externals
8428 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8429 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8430 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8431 are three variants of weak externals:
8432 @itemize
8433 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8434 called lazy externals.
8435 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8436 This form is not presently implemented.
8437 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8438 implemented.
8439 @end itemize
8440 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8441 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8442 uses a default value.
8443
8444 @cindex aligned common symbols
8445 @item aligned common symbols
8446 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8447 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8448 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8449 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8450 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8451 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8452 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8453 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8454
8455 @end table
8456
8457 @ifclear GENERIC
8458 @lowersections
8459 @end ifclear
8460 @end ifset
8461
8462 @ifset XTENSA
8463 @ifclear GENERIC
8464 @raisesections
8465 @end ifclear
8466
8467 @node Xtensa
8468 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8469
8470 @cindex Xtensa processors
8471 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8472 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8473 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8474 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8475 example, with the command:
8476
8477 @smallexample
8478 SECTIONS
8479 @{
8480 .text : @{
8481 *(.literal .text)
8482 @}
8483 @}
8484 @end smallexample
8485
8486 @noindent
8487 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8488 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8489 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8490 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8491 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8492 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8493 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8494
8495 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8496 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8497 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8498 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8499 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8500 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8501 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8502 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8503 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8504 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8505 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8506 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8507
8508 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8509 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8510 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8511 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8512 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8513 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8514 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8515 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8516 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8517 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8518 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8519 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8520 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8521 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8522
8523 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8524 control the linker:
8525
8526 @cindex Xtensa options
8527 @table @option
8528 @item --size-opt
8529 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8530 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8531 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8532 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8533 preserve the correctness of the code.
8534 @end table
8535
8536 @ifclear GENERIC
8537 @lowersections
8538 @end ifclear
8539 @end ifset
8540
8541 @ifclear SingleFormat
8542 @node BFD
8543 @chapter BFD
8544
8545 @cindex back end
8546 @cindex object file management
8547 @cindex object formats available
8548 @kindex objdump -i
8549 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8550 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8551 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8552 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8553 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8554 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8555 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8556 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8557 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8558
8559 @cindex BFD requirements
8560 @cindex requirements for BFD
8561 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8562 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8563 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8564 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8565 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8566 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8567 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8568
8569 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8570 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8571 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8572 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8573
8574 @menu
8575 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8576 @end menu
8577
8578 @node BFD outline
8579 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8580 @cindex opening object files
8581 @include bfdsumm.texi
8582 @end ifclear
8583
8584 @node Reporting Bugs
8585 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8586 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8587 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8588
8589 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8590
8591 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8592 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8593 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8594 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8595 @command{ld}.
8596
8597 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8598 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8599
8600 @menu
8601 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8602 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8603 @end menu
8604
8605 @node Bug Criteria
8606 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8607 @cindex bug criteria
8608
8609 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8610
8611 @itemize @bullet
8612 @cindex fatal signal
8613 @cindex linker crash
8614 @cindex crash of linker
8615 @item
8616 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8617 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8618
8619 @cindex error on valid input
8620 @item
8621 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8622
8623 @cindex invalid input
8624 @item
8625 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8626 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8627 object files are correct.
8628
8629 @item
8630 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8631 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8632 @end itemize
8633
8634 @node Bug Reporting
8635 @section How to Report Bugs
8636 @cindex bug reports
8637 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8638
8639 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8640 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8641 recommend you contact that organization first.
8642
8643 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8644 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8645 distribution.
8646
8647 @ifset BUGURL
8648 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8649 @value{BUGURL}.
8650 @end ifset
8651
8652 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8653 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8654 fact or leave it out, state it!
8655
8656 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8657 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8658 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8659 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8660 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8661 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8662 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8663 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8664 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8665 and the most helpful.
8666
8667 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8668 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8669 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8670
8671 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8672 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8673 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8674 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8675
8676 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8677
8678 @itemize @bullet
8679 @item
8680 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8681 the @samp{--version} argument.
8682
8683 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8684 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8685
8686 @item
8687 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8688 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8689
8690 @item
8691 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8692 version number.
8693
8694 @item
8695 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8696 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8697
8698 @item
8699 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8700 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8701 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8702 sufficient.
8703
8704 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8705 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8706
8707 @item
8708 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8709 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8710 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8711 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8712 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8713 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8714 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8715 attachments are best.
8716
8717 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8718 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8719 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8720 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8721 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8722
8723 @item
8724 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8725 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8726
8727 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8728 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8729 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8730 a chance to make a mistake.
8731
8732 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8733 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8734 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8735 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8736 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8737 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8738 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8739 any conclusion from our observations.
8740
8741 @item
8742 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8743 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8744 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8745 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8746 context, not by line number.
8747
8748 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8749 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8750 @end itemize
8751
8752 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8753
8754 @itemize @bullet
8755 @item
8756 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8757
8758 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8759 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8760 changes will not affect it.
8761
8762 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8763 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8764 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8765 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8766
8767 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8768 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8769 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8770 less time, and so on.
8771
8772 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8773 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8774
8775 @item
8776 A patch for the bug.
8777
8778 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8779 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8780 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8781 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8782
8783 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8784 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8785 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8786 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8787 fixed.
8788
8789 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8790 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8791 help us to understand.
8792
8793 @item
8794 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8795
8796 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8797 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8798 @end itemize
8799
8800 @node MRI
8801 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8802 @cindex MRI compatibility
8803 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8804 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8805 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8806 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8807 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8808 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8809 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8810
8811 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8812 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8813 features to make use of them.
8814
8815 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8816 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8817
8818 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8819 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8820 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8821 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8822 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8823
8824 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8825
8826 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8827 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8828 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8829
8830 @table @code
8831 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8832 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8833 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8834 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8835 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8836 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8837 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8838 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8839 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8840 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8841 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8842
8843 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8844 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8845 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8846 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8847
8848 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8849
8850 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8851 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8852 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8853 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8854
8855 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8856 @item BASE @var{expression}
8857 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8858 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8859
8860 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8861 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8862 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8863 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8864
8865 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8866 @item END
8867 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8868
8869 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8870 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8871 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8872 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8873
8874 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8875 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8876 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8877 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8878
8879 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8880 same line, with no change in its effect.
8881
8882 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8883 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8884 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8885 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8886 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8887 command line.
8888
8889 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8890 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8891 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8892 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8893 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8894
8895 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8896 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8897 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8898 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8899 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8900 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8901 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8902 file, in the order specified.
8903
8904 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8905 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8906 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8907 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8908 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8909 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8910
8911 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8912 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8913 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8914 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8915 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8916 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8917 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8918 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8919 @end table
8920
8921 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8922 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8923 @include fdl.texi
8924
8925 @node LD Index
8926 @unnumbered LD Index
8927
8928 @printindex cp
8929
8930 @tex
8931 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8932 % meantime:
8933 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8934 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8935 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8936 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8937 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8938 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8939 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8940 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8941 \page\colophon
8942 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8943 @end tex
8944
8945 @bye
This page took 0.216557 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.